/usr/share/fotoxx/data/userguide-en.html

<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
<html dir="ltr"><head>











    <meta content="text/html; charset=UTF-8" http-equiv="content-type"><title>Fotoxx User Guide</title></head><body style="background-color: white;">
    <span style="font-weight: bold;">Fotoxx
        User Guide&nbsp; v.15.11</span>
    <br>&nbsp;&nbsp;
<span style="font-weight: bold;"><br>
<small><small><small><small><small>&nbsp;&nbsp; </small></small></small></small></small>
</span>
<table style="text-align: left; width: 723px; height: 326px;" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
  <tbody>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#fotoxx_overview">
        Fotoxx Overview</a>
      </td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;">description, prerequisites,
        license, downloads, capabilities</td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#fotoxx_usage">Fotoxx Usage</a><br>

</td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;">initialization,
        navigation, menus, general procedures</td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#file_menu">File Menu</a></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;">open, save,
        rename, trash, delete, print</td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#metadata_menu">Metadata Menu</a></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;">edit tags, geotags, ratings, captions ... search images</td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#select_area_menu">Area Menu</a></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;">select
        image objects or areas for separate editing, copy, paste 
      </td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#edit_menu">Edit Menu</a></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;">trim/crop,
        rotate, retouch, color, tone mapping, add text ...
      </td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#repair_menu">Repair Menu</a></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;">sharpen,
        blur, denoise, red-eye, paint, clone ...
      </td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#bend_menu">Bend Menu</a></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;">bend/warp, straighten, fix perspective, flatten book page
      </td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#effects_menu">Effects Menu</a></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;">make
        drawing, painting, embossing, cartoon, add arty effects</td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#combine_menu">Combine Menu</a>
      </td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;">HDR,
        HDF, stack, panorama, mashup (montage)</td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#tools_menu">Tools Menu</a></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;">image index,
        user options, batch functions, utilities</td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#albums_menu">Albums Menu</a></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;">create and edit named collections, slide show
      </td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#batch_menu">Batch Menu</a><br>

      </td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;">batch tools for file conversion, metadata, RAW import ...<br>

      </td>
    </tr>
<tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#help_menu">Help Menu</a></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;">quick start, user guide, translations guide, change log ...
      </td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#organizing_images">Organizing Images</a></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;">optimize for searching and viewing
      </td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#translations">Translations</a><br>

      </td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;">instructions for translating the user interface language<br>

      </td>
    </tr>
<tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#recent_changes">Recent Changes</a></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;">recent
        functional and user guide changes</td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#technical_notes">Technical Notes</a></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;">technical
        methods and limitations</td>
    </tr>
  </tbody>
</table>
&nbsp; 
    &nbsp;  <br>

      <a name="fotoxx_overview"></a><br>
<big><span style="font-weight: bold;">Fotoxx Overview</span></big><br>
<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Description</span><br>

          Fotoxx is a Linux application
      for editing photos and managing a large image collection. The goal of
      Fotoxx is to meet
the needs of serious photographers while remaining fast and easy to
use. Fotoxx is standards compliant and does nothing to compromise use
of other photo apps. Fotoxx has a rich set of editing, repair, and
special effects functions. Image adjustments are displayed instandly in
a full-size image, allowing interactive
optimization. Fotoxx has a rich set of functions to organize and index
a large image collection so that finding desired images is easy and
fast. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;
    <br>
    <span style="font-weight: bold;">Hardware
      Requirements</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Fotoxx works best on a strong
      PC: 3 GHz multi-core CPU, 8 GB RAM. Multiple
      processor cores are
      used for compute intensive functions. A weaker
      PC will generally
      work, but may be slow for some functions and unable to
      edit large images. A monitor
      smaller than HD (1920 x
      1080) may feel confining.
      The monitor should have good color fidelity and good coverage of the
      standard sRGB color space. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <span style="font-weight: bold;">Software
      Requirements</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Most recent releases of popular Linux distributions will work (Debian, Ubuntu, Fedora, Suse,
Arch ...). This should be 64-bit Linux. 32-bit will work but will not
be able to edit vary large images. Fotoxx Debian packages are built and
tested using Ubuntu. A source tarball and make file is provided to
build Fotoxx for Linux flavors that use other package formats or have
incompatible libraries. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <span style="font-weight: bold;">License
        and Warranty</span> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
     Fotoxx is licensed under the
      <a href="https://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html">GNU General Public
        License v3</a>. Fotoxx is free to use, modify, and share with others. Fotoxx
      is not warranted
      for any
      purpose, but if you find a bug, I will try to fix it. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <span style="font-weight: bold;">Origin
        and Contact</span><br>

      Fotoxx origniates from the author's web site: <a href="http://kornelix.com/">kornelix.com</a>.<br>

        If you have questions,
      suggestions, or a bug to report, you may <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="http://kornelix.com/contact/">contact
      me</a>. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <span style="font-weight: bold;">Downloads </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Latest source code for use with $
      make:&nbsp; <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="http://www.kornelix.com/tarballs.html">tarballs</a> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Latest installable
        package (.deb):&nbsp; <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="http://www.kornelix.com/packages.html">packages</a> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Fotoxx packages are available on many web sites and Linux distros. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Some
        of these are quite old</span> and should be avoided. It
      is better to use the above
      links. <br>

      <br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Optional Package fotoxx-maps</span><br style="font-weight: bold;">

      <span style="font-weight: bold;"></span>This
is a set of geographic maps covering the world. They display image
locations as red dots that can be clicked to display a corresponding
image gallery. Modern cameras with GPS
receivers automatically add geotags (earth coordinates) to photos, and
these are used by Fotoxx to locate images on a map. Geotags can also be
added to images manually. You can add maps of your own at any scale,
and your images will populate the map automatically. A source tarball
and .deb package are available on <a href="http://kornelix.com">kornelix.com</a>.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;

    <br>
<table style="text-align: left; width: 739px; height: 364px;" border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
  <tbody>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
        Fotoxx Capabilities </span><br style="font-weight: bold; font-family: sans-serif;">

     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Thumbnail
      browser / navigator with variable size thumbnails and list view.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Camera RAW
      file
      conversion with retention of 16 bits per color.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Internal
      processing in 24 bits per color (float), image file output in 8 or 16
      bits.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

     &nbsp; +&nbsp; A
      comprehensive
      set of image edit, retouch and repair functions: brightness,
      <br>


      &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp; color, contrast, tone mapping, trim/crop,
      resize, rotate, sharpen, de-noise, paint,
      <br>

&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; clone, red eyes, add text, warp,
      HDR, panorama, art effects ...<br>


     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Select
      image areas or objects, edit
      separately from background, copy and paste.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Rapid visual
      feedback using the full image or a selected zoom-in area.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp; +&nbsp;
      Metadata editing and reporting (tags,
      dates, captions, geotags, any metadata ... )<br>

&nbsp; +&nbsp; Batch editing: record a series of edits on one image, execute on many images.<br>


    &nbsp;
      +&nbsp; Batch tools for
      file renaming, resizing, converting, adding and revising metadata.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Search and view images
      using any metadata, directory / file names or substrings.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Generate table of image locations and date ranges, click to search and view.<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Find images by location by clicking on a map. Add your own maps at any scale. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Create albums
      (selection of any images). Arrange sequence by drag and drop.<br>


     &nbsp; +&nbsp;
      Mashup:
      arrange images and text in an arbitrary layout (montage).<br>


     &nbsp; +&nbsp;
      Slide show: use various animated transitions and slow zoom-in or zoom-out.<br>

&nbsp; +&nbsp; Image printing and printer color calibration tool. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Comprehensive
      user guide and help popups.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
      </td>
    </tr>
  </tbody>
</table>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;"></span> <span style="font-weight: bold;">Translations</span><br>
Translations of the user interface are complete for French, German, Spanish, Catalan, Italian, Portuguese.<br>Partial translations are available for Dutch and Russian.<br>
If you can help with translations, review the topic <a href="#translations">Translations</a>.<br>

      &nbsp;
     <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="fotoxx_usage"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <big><span style="font-weight: bold;">Fotoxx Usage</span></big><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <span style="font-weight: bold;">Quick
        Start</span> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    This 1-page <a href="file:///usr/share/fotoxx/data/quickstart-en.html">document</a>
      is shown
      when Fotoxx is started the first time. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    It is also available via the
      menu&nbsp; Help &gt; Quick Start. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;
    <br>
    <span style="font-weight: bold;">User Guide</span> (this document)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Fotoxx is easy to use but
      <span style="text-decoration: underline;">unconventional</span>. To avoid confusion, please
        read the first few
        pages of this guide. The rest
      can be used for
      reference as needed. The
      user guide is available in the
      menu
      Help &gt; User Guide. When
      using Fotoxx, press the F1
      key at any time to view information for the current or last used menu
      function. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    The term <span style="text-decoration: underline;">directory</span>
      is used in Fotoxx, and is
      the equivalent of <span style="text-decoration: underline;">folder</span> in
      Windows land. The terms <span style="text-decoration: underline;">file</span>
      and <span style="text-decoration: underline;">image</span> and <span style="text-decoration: underline;">image
        file</span> mean a single file of
      type JPEG, PNG, TIFF, RAW, etc. containing a single image (photo or
      illustration). <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <span style="font-weight: bold;">Installation </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    To install Fotoxx, try the
      appropriate package first: <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="http://www.kornelix.com/packages.html" target="_blank">packages</a>. This may work with one
      click. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    If not, you must install from
      source code. This is not difficult. Instructions are here: <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="http://www.kornelix.com/tarballs.html" target="_blank">tarball</a><a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="http://www.kornelix.com/tarballs.html" target="_blank">s</a>. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;
    <br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">
      Initialization
    </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Fotoxx needs to know where all
      your image files are located (directory and file names) and their
      imbedded metadata (dates, tags (keywords), geotags, captions, comments,
      ratings). This data is indexed for fast searching. Fotoxx also creates
      thumbnail image files so that the gallery windows (thumbnail pages)
      will work fast. Fotoxx does not modify or copy your image files - it
      only reads them to make the index and thumbnails. These add roughly 1% to the file space required for your images.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    When Fotoxx starts the first
      time, you are asked to supply two items for the
      initial file indexing process:<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <img style="width: 360px; height: 338px;" alt="" src="images/index.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Top
        image Directories</span> are those containing your image files, e.g.
    <span style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">/home/&lt;user&gt;/Pictures</span>&nbsp;
      or similar. Subdirectories underneath your top directories are
      automatically included, to any depth. Use the [browse] button to locate
      and add your top image directories, one or more. Other files may be
      mixed with your image files.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Thumbnails</span>
      is the directory where thumbnail files will be placed. These are
      generally less than 1% as large as typical photo files (10K bytes compared to
      megabytes). You can use the supplied default or choose another
      location. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    If
you have many thousands of images, the file index function may need
significant time. A strong PC (3 GHz, 7200 rpm disk) will process about
1700 images per minute. Some PCs will be much slower. When you add new
image files to your collection, the next Fotoxx startup will index only
the new images, at the same speed (up to 1700 per minute). If there are
no new image files, startup should be fast (about 1 second on a strong
PC hosting 10,000 image files). For more details, see <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#index_files">Index
      Image Files</a>. <br>
<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">User Options</span><br>
Here you can make some customizations in the user interface and functionality (<a href="#user_options">link</a>).<br>
&nbsp; <br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="window_view_modes"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <span style="font-weight: bold;">Window Views
      and Menus</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <img style="width: 849px; height: 571px;" alt="" src="images/fotoxx-views.jpg" vspace="5"><br>
    &nbsp;<br>

      Use these buttons (window top left) to switch among the three viewing
      modes:<br>

      <img style="width: 632px; height: 108px;" alt="" src="images/navi-buttons.jpg" vspace="5"><br>

      Each view has a row of menu buttons on the left side. These are
      top-level menus. When clicked, available menu functions are shown in a
      drop-down list. Hover the mouse over a menu to see popup text with a
      brief description.<br>&nbsp;

      <br>
<table style="text-align: left; width: 724px; height: 385px;" border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
  <tbody>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    File View (key F)</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Zoom an image
      in
      / out with the left / right mouse buttons or mouse wheel.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Pan and scroll
      a
      zoomed image using a mouse left-drag.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;
      +&nbsp; Use the menus to
      edit the image and perform utility functions. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

     &nbsp; +&nbsp; The window
      title
      bar shows the current image file and directory path.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

     &nbsp; +&nbsp; The top panel above the image shows image and edit status information.<br>


      &nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
      <span style="font-weight: bold;">

      Gallery View (key G)</span><br>


    &nbsp;
      +&nbsp; Use the
    menus
    to navigate within the gallery, change the thumbnail size, etc. <br>

     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Click on the
      directory buttons at the top to go up to higher directories.<br>


     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Lower
      directories appear as folder thumbnails in the gallery. Click to go
      there.<br>


     &nbsp; +&nbsp; The
      [TOP]
      button shows a drop-down list of all top directories. Click to go there.<br>

     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Click a gallery
      thumbnail: show the clicked image at full window size (File View).<br>


      &nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
      <span style="font-weight: bold;">

      World Map View (key W)</span><br>


&nbsp; +&nbsp; Available only if the optional fotoxx-maps package is installed.<br>


     &nbsp; +&nbsp; The
      initial map is a very large world map (136 megapixels).<br>


     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Click
      anywhere to enlarge that map area to full size. <br>


     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Left-drag
      to pan and scroll the
      enlarged map. <br>


     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Right-click
      to collaps the map to fit
      in the window.<br>

     &nbsp; +&nbsp; If your image
      files contain geotags, corresponding red dots will appear on the map<br>


      &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; (geotags come from the camera GPS
      sensor
      or can be entered manually).<br>


     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Click
      on
      a red dot to get a gallery view of the corresponding images.<br>


     &nbsp; +&nbsp; You can
      choose among other supplied maps, and add your own maps.</td>
    </tr>
  </tbody>
</table>
&nbsp;<br><span style="font-weight: bold;"></span> The paragraphs below provide more detail about each of the viewing
      modes.<br>

    &nbsp;  <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <a name="file_view"></a><br><span style="font-weight: bold;">

      File View</span><br>

    The current image file is
      shown, filling the entire window. Click
      the arrow button to move to
      the previous or next image in the gallery. Other buttons in this view
      show popup menus which are used to modify the image or perform utility
      functions. The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">current image file</span> is a key concept in Fotoxx. This is the file that most of the menu functions will operate on. <br>

<img style="width: 413px; height: 571px;" alt="" src="images/F-menu.jpg" vspace="5"><br>

      &nbsp;  <br><span style="font-weight: bold;">

Mouse Actions
      for Image File View</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    To zoom the
      image in the main window,
      left-click a position on the image. The image will grow with each click
      and the clicked position will move to the center. A right-click will
      restore the image to fit within the window. To pan or
      scroll a zoomed image, left-drag the
      mouse across the image. The image can move with the mouse or in the
      opposite direction (like scroll bars), depending on a user setting
      (menu Tools &gt; User Setings). The movement may be 1:1 with the mouse,
      or may be magnified for faster movement. The mouse wheel
      may also
      be used to zoom the image in or out. The middle mouse button (wheel)
      will make a zoomed image re-center at the mouse position. <br>

      <br>

      Shortkut Keys for Image File View<br>

    
    <table style="text-align: left; width: 633px; height: 83px;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+ or =<br>

          </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>zoom-in (amount adjustable in
            user options)<br>


          </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>−<br>

          </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>unzoom, fit entire image
            within window<br>


          </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Z<br>

          </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>toggle: zoom to 1x image size,
            zoom back to fit window<br>


          </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>← / → keys<br>

          </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>go to previous / next image in
            current gallery<br>


          </small></td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    </table>
    &nbsp;&nbsp;
    <br>

    <a name="gallery_view"></a><br><span style="font-weight: bold;">

      Gallery
      View</span><br>

    All image files in the current
      directory are shown as thumbnails. Use this window to scroll around and
      select image files by clicking thumbnails. The arrow buttons
      allow scrolling
      forward or back by rows or pages. Use the zoom buttons to
      change the
      thumbnail size and the number of thumbnails fitting in the window.
      Clicking on a thumbnail will change to the full image view. Pressing
      the gallery button will show the gallery view, with the current image
      scrolled to the top row. The directory
        path is shown at the top of the gallery window, with one button per directory level. Click one of
      the buttons to go to that directory. Its
      subdirectories will be shown as folder thumbnails. Click one of them
      to go to
      that directory. Click the [Top] button
      to choose another top image directory (if more than one), the root
      directory ( / ) your home directory (/home/&lt;user&gt;), a gallery of
      the most recently viewed images, or a gallery of the newest images
      added to the image collection.<br>

      <img style="width: 406px; height: 522px;" alt="" src="images/G-menu.jpg" vspace="5"><br>
&nbsp; <br>

There are several types
      of galleries:<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Directory: all
      the image files in a single directory (folder)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Search
      results:
      images found by the search function, in various directories<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Images in an
      Album, which may be located in various directories<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Recent Files:
      the most recently viewed or edited images<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Newest Files:
      the images most recently added to the image collection<br>

    &nbsp;&nbsp;<br>

      The gallery window title bar will show
      the directory name (path), the album name, or <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Search Results</span> or <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Recent Files</span> or <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Newest Files</span>. Use the navigation buttons (above the thumbnails) to move around within the gallery.
      Click a thumbnail to switch to image view, where you can edit the image
      if wanted. Press the gallery button to go back to the gallery view,
      which is positioned to show the current image in the top row. <br>

      &nbsp;
      <br>
<img style="width: 36px; height: 36px;" alt="" src="../icons/sync.png" align="left">The [Sync.G] button (key S) can be used
      to reset the gallery to the directory of the current image file. For
      example, if the current gallery is the result of an image search
      function, it may contain images from multiple directories. If you click
      on a thumbnail, this becomes the current file which is shown full-size
      in file view. If you return to gallery view and press [Sync.G], The
      gallery changes to the directory of the current file.<br>

      &nbsp;
      <br>

      A gallery thumbnail has a <span style="text-decoration: underline;">right-click menu</span> with some commonly used
      functions. These include Popup Image
      and Popup Image (add).
      These create a popup window with a larger image that can be rapidly
      zoomed to any size with the mouse wheel. If Popup Image is selected
      from another thumbnail, the popup image is replaced. If the (add)
      variant is chosen, a new popup window is created. Many popup windows
      can be
      open at once. This is especially useful for comparing multiple photos
      of the same subject. If the popup image is zoomed
      down
      to a small size, it disappears. Popup Image (add) has a keyboard
      shortcut: Shift + left mouse click. F11
      can be used to expand the popup to full-screen and back. Escape
      can be used to close the
      popup.<br>

      &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    If the current gallery is not a
      directory gallery (e.g. Recent Files), you can navigate to a directory
      by using the [Top] button in the navigation bar above the thumbnails. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    The [Sort]
      button is used to sort the
      thumbnails by file name, file modification date, or photo date (from
      EXIF data). The displayed date is photo date unless the sort is by file
      date. Ascending or descending order can be chosen.<br>

      &nbsp;&nbsp;
      <br>

      <a name="world_maps_view"></a><br><span style="font-weight: bold;">

        World Maps View</span><br>

      Initially a world
      map is displayed. A left click on any area will
      expand that area to a much larger size, and a right click will return
      to the whole map view. The mouse wheel also works. Red dots
      are shown
      where there are images with a corresponding geotag location (from a
      camera GPS receiver or entered manually into the image EXIF data). The
      red dots can be clicked to show a gallery view of the corresponding
      images. <br>

    <img style="width: 449px; height: 243px;" alt="" src="images/W-menu.jpg" vspace="5"><br>

&nbsp;
    <br clear="all">
    The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Choose Map</span>
      menu offers a selection of large-scale continental maps, and you can also install
      other maps (countries, cities, parks, etc.). These all work the same
      way. Search Range allows you
      to set a search distance for matching image locations when a red dot is
      clicked. Images with geotags within the range are selected. <br>

      <img style="width: 800px; height: 249px;" alt="" src="images/map-click.jpg"><br>&nbsp;<br>
The initial maps are provided in a separate package: fotoxx-maps. Fotoxx-maps is
      large - almost 100 MB of maps are provided. You can also add your own maps, explained in
      the topic <a href="#images_by_map">Images by Map Location</a>.<br>
&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="general_editing"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    General
        Editing Procedures </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The image in file view mode (the current image) can be modified with
the edit functions in the menus Edit, Repair, Color, Bend, Effects,
Combine. These functions modify the current image in memory and as seen
in the window. You can use these functions in any order, and the
changes are accumulated. The [undo / redo] button can be used to review
the before / after results for the current active edit function. Use a
left / right mouse click for undo / redo respectively. After an edit
function is closed, this button can be used to review all the edits
done to the current image. When finished editing, use [Save] to save
the modified image back to the same file, save to a new file version
(e.g. filename.v01.jpg), or input a new file name and / or directory.
Image edit dialogs have sliders, spin buttons, or editable curves that
immediately update the image. The reaction time depends on the size of
the image, the complexity of the function and the speed of your PC.
This is typically less than second for most edit functions if using a
strong PC. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Edit Workflow</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    You can minimize the time needed
      to process many images if you understand the following: <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <ul style="font-family: sans-serif;">
      <li>Choosing a new edit function will automatically complete a prior
        active edit.<br>
        The new edit starts with the end result of the prior edit, and an undo
        / redo position is created.<br>
      </li>
      <li>Opening a new image file during an edit function will
        automatically cancel the edit.<br>
        The edit function is restarted with the new image.</li>
      <li>The [Save] button can be
        used during an active edit to save the current image status.<br>
        The edit function restarts automatically, and an undo / redo position
        is created. <br>
      </li>
      <li>Some frequently used functions have a [Prev]
        button which recalls previous
        settings, <br>
        making it easier to process multiple photos needing the same or similar
        adjustments. <br>
      </li>
    </ul><span style="text-decoration: underline;">
     Example Workflow</span>
      for
      the initial rotate and trim (crop) of a new batch of photos.<br>

      You can process one photo every few seconds (+ think time). <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
     &nbsp; 1.&nbsp; Copy files
      from the camera memory card to a directory.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    &nbsp; 2.&nbsp; Open the first
      file.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    &nbsp; 3.&nbsp; Menu &gt; Edit
      &gt; <a href="#trim_rotate">Trim/Rotate</a>.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    &nbsp; 4.&nbsp; Level the image if needed (drag the right edge).<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    &nbsp; 5.&nbsp; Trim the image
      by dragging the trim borders to suit.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    &nbsp; 6.&nbsp; Press [Save] and
      choose "overwrite" or "new version" or "new file". <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    &nbsp; 7.&nbsp; Press [Next] to
      start the next file. Press [Next] again to skip if wanted. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
     &nbsp; 8.&nbsp; Repeat steps
      4-7 for each image. The Trim/Rotate function remains open.&nbsp; 
    <br>
    &nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Simple
      Workflow</span> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Most of the time you can just
      edit the JPEG file that comes out of the camera. Use the following more
      complex procedure only if you see "color bands" or "posterization"
      after editing the image, an indication that JPEG 8-bit color is
      limiting the image quality. <br>
    &nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Complex
      Workflow </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    To edit with deep color (more
      than 8 bits), you can start with RAW
        files from your camera. There are three options for processing
      RAW files:<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <ul style="font-family: sans-serif;">
      <li>Open a RAW file directly with Fotoxx: use the [Open] button or
        click the gallery thumbnail. The RAW file may now be edited normally.
        Save the edited image file as type TIFF or PNG with 8 or 16 bit
        color, or JPEG with 8 bit color. You cannot save the edited image as a
        RAW file
        type. Opening a RAW file may need several seconds, especially on a weak
        PC, and saving a RAW file as TIFF or PNG is slower than JPEG. <br>
      </li>
      <li>Open the RAW file with one of the File &gt; Open RAW menus, or
        right-click the gallery thumbnail and use one of the popup menus. These
        are interfaces to specialized RAW editors (currently UFraw and Raw
        Therapee). Saving the file creates a TIFF-16 file in Fotoxx which may
        be further processed.<br>
      </li>
      <li>Use one of the Tools &gt; Batch RAW menus. You can select many
        RAW files and convert all of them to type TIFF or PNG with 8 or 16 bit
        color, or JPEG with 8 bit color. You may then select and edit these
        files with Fotoxx. </li>
    </ul>
    
      RAW files may have more color
      depth than 8 bits, especially if the
      camera is new and very expensive. Conversion into a PNG or TIFF file
      with 16 bit color will
      preserve the additional color depth available in the RAW file. The
      higher
      color depth reduces the risk of visible color bands or speckles when
      retouch
      functions are used that can radically shift the brightness
      distribution. When
      finished editing, convert the final file to JPEG (quality level 70 or
      greater) to reduce the file size to 10% or less. Note that editing in
      deep color is more important than having deep color in the final image.
      You will not be able to see any difference between a 16 bit TIFF /
      PNG file and a JPEG made from that same file. To preserve the
      possibility of re-editing the image later, keep the RAW file, which is
      smaller than the TIFF or PNG file. <br>

&nbsp;<br><span style="font-weight: bold;">

Mouse
      Ownership</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Some dialogs use the mouse to
      reference or alter the image in the main window. There may be more than
      one such dialog active at the same time. The mouse is also used to zoom
      and scroll the image, and you may need to do this while using a dialog.
      Therefore it is important to understand who owns the mouse (which
      dialog or main window) and how to change the ownership: 
    
<ul style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<li>The mouse is owned by the dialog that was last clicked or used.
        Mouse clicks and drags on the image are inputs to this dialog and DO
        NOT zoom or scroll the image. </li><li>If you hold the CTRL key
        down while clicking or dragging the mouse, the image will zoom or pan /
        scroll, and active dialogs are not affected. </li><li> The mouse wheel can always be used to zoom-in on any part of the image.<br>
      </li>
</ul><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    
        Dialog buttons</span> mostly work as follows:<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; [Proceed] -
      proceed with lengthy task based on dialog inputs.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; [Apply] -
      apply settings from dialog to image, leave dialog active.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; [Done] - same
      as [Apply], but the dialog is closed.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; [Cancel] -
      discard image changes and close the dialog. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; <br>

    
    <table style="text-align: left; width: 780px; height: 475px;" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="2">
      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="curve_editing"></a> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
            Curve
              Editing</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
            <img style="width: 262px; height: 415px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/retouch-combo.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>

              Some image edit functions use editable curves. You can manipulate the
              curves to change some property of the image depending on some other
              property. The example here shows a brightness curve, whereby you can
              change brightness depending on brightness (e.g. brighten dark image
              areas without changing bright areas). Generally, the X-axis of the
              curve represents the input property (brightness in this example) and
              the Y-axis the output property (also brightness). The curves can be
              moved (pulled) with the mouse. "Up" increases the effect and "down"
              decreases the effect. An anchor point (black dot) is added to the curve
              wherever it is pulled, and this point remains fixed for subsequent
              pulls: the curve will continue to go through this point as other parts
              of the curve are pulled. Anchor points can also be dragged. Delete an
              anchor point by right-clicking it. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
            </td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    </table>
    &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="batch_editing"></a><br><span style="font-weight: bold;">

      Batch Editing </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    There are some batch functions
      in the gallery view Tools menu to speed some common tasks. <br>

      You can select any number
      of image files (<a href="#gallery_selection">link</a>) and apply a batch function to all of them. <br>

      <br>

      Batch functions can be used for the following tasks:<br>

      &nbsp; +&nbsp; Rename files (using a base name and sequence number)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Convert file
      types (e.g. png to jpeg)<br>

      &nbsp; +&nbsp; Find
      and
      upright photos made with the camera turned 90\B0<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Resize files
      (e.g. reduce for web upload or e-mail)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Copy or move
      files to another location<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Convert RAW
      files to tiff, png, or jpeg<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Add / change /
      remove tags or geotags<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Delete files or move them to Trash<br>

    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="gallery_selection"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Selecting
        Image Files from an Image Gallery Window </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    This procedure is used for all
      functions that operate on multiple image files (batch add or delete
      tags, batch convert images, batch RAW convert, manage albums,
      others). It is explained once here, and this topic is linked from each
      of the functions using this procedure.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
    <img style="width: 659px; height: 432px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/gallery-select.jpg" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
     The dialog box is used to
      select image files. Behind it is a gallery window for the current
      directory, album, or search results. To select an image, click its
      thumbnail and the image file will be added to the list in the dialog.
      Other options are shown below. You can navigate the gallery window to
      other directories by clicking on the directory names at the top or
      clicking on thumbnails represending subdirectories. You can choose
      images from any gallery in any order. The list of image files can also
      be manipulated to change the sequence or remove images added by
      mistake. Click on a file in the list to show its thumbnail in the
      dialog and also set the current list position. The next image file
      added will be inserted at this position. If the [delete] button is
      pressed, the current list position will be deleted, and if the [insert]
      button is pressed, the last deleted image file will be inserted at the
      current position. The last 100 images deleted are saved and can be
      re-inserted anywhere: each use of the [insert] button removes one image
      from the saved list and inserts it at the current position. To move
      images to a new position in the list: click the image file (its
      thumbnail will be shown), click [delete]. Repeat to delete more images.
      Click an image file to set the insert position, then click [insert].
      The first deleted image will be inserted before the selected image.
      Repeat to insert more images from the deleted list. The file list in
      the dialog can also be edited directly: you can use cut and paste to
      get the sequence you wish, but be careful to always cut and paste
      entire lines (files). The [add_all] button will add all the image files
      in the current image gallery. After using Search Images to establish a
      set of images, the gallery window will contain this set. You can select
      individual images from the gallery, or use [add all] and then delete
      unwanted images. A single image may also be added multiple times to the
      list.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">
    Thumbnail
      click rules:</span><br>

    &nbsp; +&nbsp; left
    click: add the image at the current list position.<br>
    &nbsp; +&nbsp; right
    click: remove the image from the list, if present.<br>
    &nbsp; +&nbsp; Shift +
    left click: add all images from the last image added to
    the clicked image.<br>&nbsp;
    <br><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Menu
        Shortcuts </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    The Fotoxx menus are large. You
      may need time to get used to them and remember where the functions are
      located. There are three shortcut methods available for frequently used
      functions:<br>

    
    <ul style="font-family: sans-serif;">
      <li>Right-click the main window or gallery window thumbnail. <br>
        A popup menu appears with some commonly used menu functions. <br>

        </li>
      <li>Keyboard shortcuts -
        these are documented in a table below. <br>
        You can also add your own shortcuts for menu functions you choose. <br>

        </li>
      <li>Favorites menu - a
        graphic popup menu. You can add text and / or icons that link to any
        menu functions you choose. You can arrange them in a layout window. You
        can leave this window open and access any function with a single mouse
        click. <br>
      </li>
    </ul><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Right-Click
Popup
      Menus </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
These menus appear when the image view window or a gallery thumbnail is
right-clicked with the mouse. These are the most frequently used
functions and are available as popup menus for convenience. Most of
these are also contained in one of the left-side main menus for image
view and gallery view, as shown above. <br><small><small><small>&nbsp; </small></small></small><br>

    
    <table style="text-align: left; width: 790px; height: 655px; font-family: sans-serif;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><span style="font-weight: bold;">&nbsp;Image View popup</span><br>



            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br>



            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;View Metadata<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Show short form metadata report<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Edit Metadata<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Edit photo date/time, rating, tags, captions, comments<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Edit Geotags<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Edit photo latitude / longitude, place name, country<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Rename<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Change the file name<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
<tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Copy to Location<br>



            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Copy the image file to
              another location (duplicate the file)<br>



            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Move to Location<br>



            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Move the image file to
              another location (delete the original)<br>



            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Copy to Image Cache<br>



            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Add the image file to the
              file cache for later pasting into an album<br>



            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Copy to Clipboard <br>



            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Copy the image file to
              the clipboard (for other apps to paste)<br>



            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Upright<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Upright the image that is turned 90 degrees<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Trim/Rotate<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Trim (crop) the image, level the image or turn 90 degrees<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Resize<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Resize (rescale) the image width and height<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Voodoo Enhance<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Limited automatic image enhancement <br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Retouch Combo<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Adjust brightness, color, contrast, saturation, black point, white balance<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Brightness Dist.<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Adjust the brightness distribution (flatten, broaden, change black and white points)<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Zonal Flatten<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Enhance contrast and brighten shadows, especially image areas with low contrast<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Tone Mapping<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Enhance contrast and apparent brightness range by increasing brightness gradients<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Select Area<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Select an image object or area for separate editing <br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Trash<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Move the image file into the wastebasket<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Delete<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Delete the image file<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
<tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><span style="font-weight: bold;">&nbsp;Gallery View
                popup</span><br>



            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br>



            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Popup Image <br>



            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Show image in a larger window - resizable, movable, persistent until canceled<br>



            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Popup Image (add) <br>



            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Same as above, but a new
              window is opened instead of re-using the previous one<br>



            </small></td>
        </tr>
        
        <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;View Metadata<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Show short form metadata report</small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Rename<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Change the file name</small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Upright<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Upright the image that is turned 90 degrees</small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Copy to Location<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Copy the image file to
              another location (duplicate the file)</small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Move to Location<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Move the image file to
              another location (delete the original)</small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Copy to Image Cache<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Add the image file to the
              file cache for later pasting into an album</small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Copy to Clipboard<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Copy the image file to
              the clipboard (for other apps to paste)</small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Trash<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Move the image file into the wastebasket</small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Delete<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Delete the image file</small></td>
    </tr>
<tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><span style="font-weight: bold;">&nbsp;Popup Image
                shortcut</span><br>



            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Shift
key + left click on a gallery thumbnail creates a popup window
containing the image. <br>



Zoom in/out using the mouse wheel. When zoomed
small it disappears. <br>



            </small></td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    </table>
    &nbsp; &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Keyboard
        Shortcuts </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Keyboard shortcuts are available
      for some functions. The notation "Alt+G" means press and hold the Alt
      key, then press the G key. Many of these can be changed, and new
      shortcuts can be added (see <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#KB_shortcuts">KB
      shortcuts</a>). <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><small><small><small>
    &nbsp;&nbsp; </small></small></small><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <table style="text-align: left; width: 691px; height: 631px; font-family: sans-serif;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><span style="font-weight: bold;">General</span><br>

          </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br>

          </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;F / G / W&nbsp;
              keys</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Change view mode: image File,
              Gallery, World
              maps</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;F1 function key</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Display user guide for
              current or prior function</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;F11 function key</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Toggle main window to
              full-screen (no menu) and back</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br>

          </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br>

          </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; font-weight: bold;"><small>Image
              File View<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;left / right arrow
              keys </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Previous / next image </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;+ or =&nbsp;
              /&nbsp; - keys </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Zoom image bigger /
              smaller (zoom amount adjustable in User Options)<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Z </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Toggle: zoom image to
              100% / fit image in window </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;S<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Sync Gallery to current
              image file<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;M</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Magnify Image</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;P</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Open Previous File (or
              toggle between last two files)<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;U</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Undo current edit, or
              undo one edit step in the current image</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Shift+U </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Redo current edit, or
              redo one edit step in the current image</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;N</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Rename Image File</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;K</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>View and edit keyboard
              shortcuts<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Alt+G</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Grid Lines on / off
              (toggle)<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;T</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Trim/Rotate Image</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;V</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Voodoo Enhance</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;R</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Retouch Combo </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Escape key</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Exit a dialog, exit Slide
              Show mode<br>

          </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Space Bar</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Pause / resume a running
              slide show<br>

          </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br>

          </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br>

          </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; font-weight: bold;"><small>Gallery
              View<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Home / End keys </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>move to first / last page
              of image gallery </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Page Up / Down keys </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>move to previous / next
              page of image gallery </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;up / down arrow
              keys </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>move up / down by one row
              of image gallery</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;left / right arrow
              keys </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>move to previous / next
              page of image gallery</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;+ or =&nbsp;
              /&nbsp; -&nbsp; keys </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>bigger / smaller
              thumbnail size </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Escape key</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small> exit a dialog<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    </table>
    &nbsp;&nbsp;
     <br style="font-family: sans-serif; font-weight: bold;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Mouse
      Functions</span>
    <table style="text-align: left; width: 783px; height: 128px; font-family: sans-serif;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: middle;"><small>&nbsp;left click </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: middle;"><small>Zoom-in: magnify
              image, center at click position </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: middle;"><small>&nbsp;right click </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: middle;"><small>Zoom-out: restore
              image to window size. If no zoom, popup menu with common functions. </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;mouse wheel </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Zoom in and out depending
              on wheel direction </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td><small>&nbsp;left drag on image </small></td>
          <td><small>Pan / scroll zoomed image, same direction or magnified
              opposite direction (like scroll bars) </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;right drag on
              gallery</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Scroll down or up by
              dragging to the top or bottom edge, faster as mouse approaches the edge.<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;mouse + Ctrl key<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Mouse acts on main window
              instead of a mouse-using dialog like Select Area.<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    </table>
    &nbsp;&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Managing
        a Large Image Collection </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    You can use Fotoxx to manage a
      huge image collection and still be able to quickly find the images you
      want. Some effort by the user to organize the images is required.
      Search methods include directory and file names (or partial names),
      image dates, image
      ratings, tags (labels for persons, places, objects, events ...),
      captions and comments, and geotags (location names and latitude /
      longitude). This is done in a standards-compliant manner so that data
      can be shared with other image management applications. Options for how
      to
      organize a large image collection can be found in the topic <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#organizing_images">Organizing
      Images</a>. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    &nbsp; <br>
&nbsp; <br>
&nbsp; <br><big><span style="font-weight: bold;">
Menu Functions</span></big><br>

&nbsp;&nbsp;
    <br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="favorites_menu"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <img style="width: 39px; height: 39px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="../icons/favorites.png" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Favorites</span> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <img style="width: 518px; height: 176px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/favorites.jpg" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    This is a graphic popup menu which you can populate with your frequently used functions
      and arrange them on the window using the mouse. An initial popup
      window (left image) is supplied. Right click an empty space on the window
      to define a new menu entry. Right click an existing entry to modify it.
      Use the resulting dialog (right image) to define or change the menu
      entry.<br>

      &nbsp; <br>

    
    <table style="text-align: left; width: 663px; height: 94px; font-family: sans-serif;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;menu text </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>text for the popup menu -
              optional if a menu icon is used </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;menu func</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>the Fotoxx function to
              use - the exact menu name</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;menu icon</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>menu icon -
              /directory.../filename.png - optional if a menu text is used </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;icon size </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>if an icon is used, its size
              can be 24x24 to 64x64 pixels </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;close window </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>checkbox: option to close the popup
              window when this menu is selected</small></td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    </table>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Left drag a menu entry to move
      it somewhere else on the popup window. The popup window can be resized
      to fit the contained menu entries. Left click a menu entry to select
      the menu. If "close window" was checked, the popup window will close.
      All menu settings and icon files are saved in a configuration file
      whenever the popup window is closed. The configuration file and saved
      icons are located in the directory&nbsp; /home/&lt;user&gt;/.fotoxx/favorites.
      The configuration file can be edited directly - at your own risk. You
      can use either the English menu names or their translations for your
      locale. The menu names must exactly match the Fotoxx menus, but case is
      not significant. The menu text may include "\n" to represent a newline
      character. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Icon
        library: Icons for most image edit functions can be found here: <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    &nbsp;
      /usr/share/fotoxx/icons/edit-funcs <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp; <br>
&nbsp; <br>
&nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="file_menu"></a><br>
<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src="../icons/file.png" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><big><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    File
        Menu</span></big> <br>

      &nbsp;
      <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="new_window"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    New
        Window </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Start a new instance of Fotoxx
      in a new window, slightly offset for visibility. This is useful to
      compare images or to work with more than one image at a time. Both
      windows can be used to edit images. The new window will initially have
      an unmodified version of the current image file. If the same image file
      is edited in both windows, the final result is the file saved last. <br>&nbsp; <br>
&nbsp; <br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Sync Gallery<br>
</span>Initialize the current gallery from the directory of the current image file (<a href="#sync_gallery">link</a>).<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="recent_images"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Recently Seen
      Images</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

     The 100 most recently seen
      image files (viewed or edited) are shown in a gallery, from which you
      can select a file to open.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="newest_images"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Newest Images</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

     The 1000 most recently added or
      modified image files are
      shown in a gallery, from which
      you can select files to view or edit. You are given a choice of using
      the EXIF photo date or the file modification date to determine the
      newest images. If the EXIF date is chosen, image files having no EXIF
      date are ignored. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="open_image_file"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Open
        Image File  </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    This function starts a standard
      file open dialog, allowing you to select an image file or navigate to
      another directory and select an image file. The selected file is opened
      in the Fotoxx main window where you can view or edit the image file
      using the menus and buttons. The main window title bar always shows the
      file name and directory of the current image file. Drag and drop can
      also be used to open a file: drag an image file from Nautilus (or other
      source) to the Fotoxx window, and Fotoxx will open the file. If text is
      dragged from gedit (or other program with drag sourcing), Fotoxx will
      assume the text is a filespec and try to open it. Thus you can make a
      list of filespecs in a text file and use this list with Fotoxx.
      Effectively, you can use Nautilus or text files to navigate images as
      an alternative to the Fotoxx navigation system.
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Camera
        RAW files can also be opened. This may need a few seconds
      depending on file size and processor speed.&nbsp; You can proceed to
      edit the RAW file like any other image file. RAW files are also
      included in thumbnail galleries, as long as a .jpeg thumbnail image can
      be extracted from the RAW file (normally true). When saving a RAW file,
      you must specify a type TIFF or PNG (8 or 16 bit color), or JPEG (8
      bit). <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="open_previous_file"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Open
        Previous File</span> (Key P) <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Go back to the previously opened
      image file, also if this is in a different directory. This differs from
      the button [Prev/Next] which goes to the previous or next image file in
      the current gallery (directory, search results, album). This
      function retains the current image zoom size and position, which is
      ideal for rapidly comparing two edited versions of the same image.
      Zoom-in on the area to compare, and use this function to switch back
      and forth between the two images.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="open_raw_file"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Open RAW File
      (ufraw)</span><br style="font-weight: bold;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

      Open RAW File (rawtherapee)</span><br style="font-weight: bold;">

    <br>

      Select and open a RAW camera file using either Ufraw or RawTherapee. <br>

      You can make adjustments to the RAW file such as color temperature,
      white balance, brightness, color, noise, etc. from the program GUI.
      When the file is saved, a TIFF file is created with 16-bit color depth.
      This file is now opened in Fotoxx and can be further edited, saved as
      JPEG, etc. The RAW file type (file extension) must be included in the
      list of known RAW file types in Tools &gt; <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#user_options">User Options</a>. <br>

      <br>

      Raw Therapee does not allow the location and type of the output file to
      be determined from a calling program, therefore you must save the
      output file where Fotoxx can find it - in the same directory as the RAW
      file. The file type must be TIFF (.tif) with a color depth of 16 bits.<br>&nbsp; <br>

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="new_blank_image"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">
    New
        Blank Image </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Create a blank image with
      specified pixel dimensions and color. This can be used as a background
      for cutouts taken from other images (via <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="userguide-en.html#select_area">Select
      Area</a>) and annotation text (via <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="userguide-en.html#add_text">Add Text</a>). Input a file name,
      choose a
      background color, and set the desired pixel dimensions. See also the <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="userguide-en.html#mashup">Mashup</a> function.<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;  <br>
<table style="text-align: left; width: 839px; height: 176px;" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="2">
      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="rename_file"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
            Rename
                Image File</span>&nbsp; (key N) <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
            <img style="width: 310px; height: 156px;" alt="" src="images/rename.jpg" align="left">This function can automate the
              process of renaming a series of image files using a root name (e.g. an
              event or place name) and a sequence number. Open the first image file
              in the series, input a new name, and press the [apply] button. Use the
              [next] button to move to the next file if wanted. You can use the same
              name again by pressing the [previous name] button and then add a suffix
              or sequence number. Press the [add 1] button to increment the sequence
              number. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
          </td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    </table>
    &nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="trash_image"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Trash
        Image File </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Fotoxx uses the Linux desktop
      standard for trash. If this works, trashed image files go into the
      standard trash location and can be recovered later if wanted.
      Otherwise, Fotoxx puts trashed images into a desktop directory named
      "fotoxx-trash". You can delete it or move it to your Linux-specific
      trash. If both standard
      and
      desktop trash do not work (some distros are like this), you are given
      the option to delete the image file. <br>

      &nbsp;
      <br>

      <a name="delete_image"></a><br><span style="font-weight: bold;">

      Delete Image File</span><br>

      The current image file is deleted permanently. There is no recovery
      possible. <br>

      &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="print_image"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Print Image
      File</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <img style="width: 680px; height: 201px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/print.jpg" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    The print menu brings up a
      standard Page Setup dialog where you can select a printer, a paper size
      (letter, A4, etc.), and orientation (portrait or landscape). Select
      your printer (do not use a default setting). The paper size shown will
      be the one last set in the Printer Properties dialog (a separate admin
      function in the System menu). If
        the paper size is wrong, fix it using the Printer Properties dialog.
      Changing the paper in the Page Setup dialog may be ignored or lead to a
      "paper mismatch" failure. After using the [apply] button, another
      dialog starts for entering paper margins and an image scale. The
      margins can be used to shrink the image or shift it on the page. Image
      scale can be set in the range 5-100%, where 100% means print the
      maximum size image that fits within the margins. Smaller values will
      shrink the image proportionally. The actual print size (image width and
      height in centimeters) is updated in the dialog as margins and scale
      are changed, and this can be used to reach a desired printed image
      size. After the margins dialog, a Print dialog starts for the actual
      printing. This includes paper type and qality inputs, and a preview of
      the printed layout which can be accepted or rejected. <br>
<br><span style="font-weight: bold;">
Print Calibrated Image</span><br style="font-weight: bold;">
This function works like Print Image File described above, but before
printing you are asked to supply a calibration file name which is used
to adjust image colors prior to printing. The purpose is to compensate
for color distortions caused by the printer. See the topic <a href="#calibrate_printer">calibrate_printer</a> for details on how to create a calibration file. <br>
&nbsp;<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;
 <br><a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="file_save"></a><br>

<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src="../icons/save.png" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">


    
    Save
        to Disk</span> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 291px; height: 177px;" alt="" src="images/file-save1.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
<img style="width: 470px; height: 483px;" alt="" src="images/file-save2.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    In the first dialog, select one
      of the three options: new version, new file name, or replace file.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    
        New Version</span>: Save the current image file with a new version
      number. File names with version numbers are formatted
      "filename.vNN.ext" where NN is a version number 01 to 99.&nbsp; The 4
      characters .vNN are inserted between the file name and extension. If
      the file name has no versions, version .v01 will be created. If file
      versions are already present on disk, then the next higher version
      number is used. If the file is a
      JPEG file, the default quality is used (this value can be set in <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#user_options">User Options</a>). <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    
        New File</span>:
The 2nd dialog shown above will open to save the current image file to
a selected file, which can be the original file, another existing file,
or a new file. An edited image file can be saved in formats JPEG, PNG
and TIFF. JPEG is normally the best option, since these are compressed
to reduce space. You can choose a JPEG quality value in the range
1-100. Lower values give smaller files and less image quality. Values
above 70 are generally hard to distinguish from 100 (highest quality,
largest file size). PNG files are compressed without any loss of
quality and are larger than JPEG files of the highest quality. TIFF
files are uncompressed and larger than JPEG or PNG. TIFF and PNG files
may be saved with 8 or 16 bits per color. The 16-bit formats only makes
sense for files converted from a RAW format having more than 8 bits per
color. It is rare that the difference between 8 and 16 bits per color
can be seen with the eye. However, an image with higher bits has more
latitude when the brightness distribution is altered with a program
like Fotoxx. PNG-16 files are smaller than TIFF-16 but slower to save
due to the compression process. Saving a file as TIFF or PNG can be
quite slow for a large image and a slow computer. If an image has transparency
information (e.g. a Bend function creates a non-rectangular image shape
with transparent peripheral areas), you should save the image as a PNG
file if you want the transparent areas to be preserved for some later
operation. If you use JPEG, these areas will be black and opaque. JPEG
does not support transparency. <br>&nbsp;
<br>
If <span style="text-decoration: underline;">make current</span> is 
checked, the saved file (new file name) will become the current file. 
The source file (old file name) remains unchanged. If not checked, the 
file is saved with the new name, but the current file remains the source
 file (old name). In either case, the edit history is retained (i.e. Undo and Redo will still work).<br>
&nbsp; 
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    
        Replace</span>: Save the current image file back to itself. If a JPEG
      file, the default quality is used (this value can be set in <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="userguide-en.html#user_options">User Options</a>). <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">File sizes for a 10-megapixel
      image are roughly as follows (depending on image detail).<br>

      The jpeg numbers are the quality value given when the file is saved to
      disk.<br>

    
    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 563px; height: 35px; font-family: sans-serif;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">

      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>tiff-16</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>tiff-8 </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>png-16 </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>png-8 </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>jpeg-100 </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>jpeg-90 </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>jpeg-80 </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>jpeg-70 </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>70 MB </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>35 MB </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>23 MB </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>17 MB </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>8 MB </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>3 MB </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>2 MB </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>1 MB </small></td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>

    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    The default JPEG quality is used
      unless you change the value in the save-as dialog. The default value is a <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#user_options">User Options</a>
option, and is initially set at 90. You will not be able to see a
difference between a file saved with quality=90 and one saved with 100,
but the difference in file space is huge. The <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#technical_notes">Technical
      Notes</a> section describes
      potential loss of image quality from repeated open, edit and save of JPEG
      images. At the default quality of 90 this issue can be generally ignored. <br>
&nbsp; <br>
<a name="prev_next"></a><br>
<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src="../icons/prev_next.png"><br><span style="font-weight: bold;">
Previous / Next Image</span> <br>
Click with the left or right mouse button to open the previous or next
image file in the current gallery. If the current image has unsaved
edits, you are warned and given the option to cancel this function. If
you proceed, the edits are lost. You must save an edited image before
moving to another image.<br>
&nbsp; <br>
&nbsp; <br>
&nbsp; <br>
<a name="metadata_menu"></a><br>
<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src="../icons/metadata.png" vspace="5"><br><big><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Metadata
        Menu</span></big> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Metadata means text data that is
      stored inside an image file. Digital cameras create some
      data automatically, such as date and time, technical data about the
      camera and photo parameters, and location data (if the camera has a GPS receiver).
      Other data can be added by the user, such as captions, comments,
      ratings, and tags (keywords that can be used to search images, e.g.
      persons, places, things, events). <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">There are several <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#organizing_images">alternatives</a> for
      organizing a large image
      collection so that it can be easily searched. It would be good to
      review these before choosing an organization system. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

     &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="view_metadata"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    View Metadata
      (short)</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif; font-weight: bold;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    View Metadata
      (long) </span><br>

    <img style="width: 515px; height: 580px;" alt="" src="images/view-metadta.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br>

      &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Short Report<br>

    <br>

    <br>

    <br>

    <br>

    <br>

    <br>

    <br>

    <br>

    <br>

    <br>

    <br>

    <br>

    <br>

    <br>

    Long Report<br clear="all">

    <br>

    The View Metadata functions will
      display available metadata for the current image file. EXIF
      metadata contains the date and time of a photo, shutter speed, focal
      length, pixel dimensions, etc. Digital cameras store this data inside
      the image. IPTC metadata contains tags (from Fotoxx, Photoshop ...) and
      captions (frequently found in published images). If an image is edited
      and then saved, the metadata is updated and stored with the new image.
      The View Metadata short report outputs the most commonly needed data,
      including the photo date and time, user-assigned tags and star rating, comments,
      caption, and a history of Fotoxx edit functions that have been applied
      to the image. The long report reports all metadata available. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Fotoxx uses the following EXIF /
      IPTC data items:<br><small><small><small>

      &nbsp; <br>
</small></small></small>

    
    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 570px; height: 162px; font-family: sans-serif;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">

      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; font-weight: bold;"><small>Key
              Name </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; font-weight: bold;"><small>Fotoxx
              Usage </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Date / Time Original </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Edit Metadata function -
              image date </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Keywords </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Edit Metadata function -
              image tags </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Rating </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Edit Metadata function -
              image stars </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>User Comments </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Edit Metadata function </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; height: 20px;"><small>Caption-Abstract</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; height: 20px;"><small>Edit
              Metadata function</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Geotags </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Edit Geotags function, 3
              search image functions </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Image History<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>History of Fotoxx edits
              applied to the image </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>any key </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Edit Any Metadata, Delete
              Metadata </small></td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>

     &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="show_captions"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Show Captions
      on Image</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Show the metadata items IPTC
      Caption and EXIF User Comments at the top of each image displayed. This
      menu is a toggle switch - the display of captions and comments is set
      on and off alternatively. If neither is available, nothing is
      displayed. If only one is available, it is displayed. If both are
      available, they are displayed on two lines. The lengths are truncated
      at 200 characters. To see up to 1000 characters, use the <a href="#view_metadata">View Metadata</a>
      function. If Show Captions switched ON, captions and comments are also
      displayed during a <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#slide_show">Slide Show</a>.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="tags_overview"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Tags
        Overview </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Image files can have
      identification or classification tags (keywords, labels) assigned to them. These can
      be used to search a large image collection for those images having
      desired tags. Typical tags: the main subject of a photo, the associated
      event, the location, the persons or things contained, etc. Tags reside
      inside the image metadata (IPTC:keywords). Tags are normally one word,
      but a short phrase with imbedded blanks or other delimiters can be
      used. Commas and semicolons are recognized internally as delimiters
      (separators) between tags, and therefore cannot be used within a tag. A
      compound tag like <span style="text-decoration: underline;">arizona scenery</span> is allowed, but you should use two
      tags instead for more flexibility: you can search for images having
      either tag or both tags. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Regardless of the physical organization of your images (directory and
file names), tags can be used to create other organizations. All images
having a desired tag or tags can be found quickly and displayed in an
image gallery window, where you can further review the images and
choose those for viewing, editing, or changing their tags. If you have
used directory and file names in a meaningful way, you can search for
images using these names as well as tags. You can also search images by
date, rating, location, and other metadata items. These need not be
duplicated in tags. See <a href="#search_images">Search Images</a> below. <span style="text-decoration: underline;"></span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Managed Tag System</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;"></span>This
is appropriate if you are starting from near nothing and you are able
to plan your tag system before adding tags to your images. In this
system, you create a limited number of tag categories (e.g. people,
places, things, events, holidays, art ...). You then plan the tags or
types of tags that will go into each category. Tags are created and
assigned to a category as needed during the process of tagging images.
An image is tagged by pointing and clicking on the list of available
tags, which is organized by category and alphabetically within
category. If a new tag is needed, it is created before it can be
assigned to an image. The total number of tags should be less than
about 500, to keep the list small enough for rapid visual location of
tags to click on. Searching images by tags is also done by pointing and
clicking on the list of available tags.<br>
&nbsp; <br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">managed tag system advantages </span><br>
+ prevent inconsistent tag names (e.g. landscape, scenery)<br>
+ prevent alternate spellings and typos (e.g. susan, susy, scenery, scenrey)<br>
+ prevent tags that logically include other tags (e.g. landscape, lake)<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; (this can be planned and deliberate, but should not happen by accident)<br>
+ searching is reliable because tags do not have the above errors<br>
&nbsp;<br>
A large tag list (over 500) slows down the process of tagging images
due to the time needed to visually find the tag in the long list
(possibly in a scrolled window). <span style="font-weight: bold;"></span>This problem is reduced somewhat because a few most recently used tags are
shown separately in the edit dialog, where they can be easily
seen and chosen. Since a series of photos made at the same time will
likely share many tags, adding tags to such a series is made easier and faster. <br>&nbsp;

<br>
If tags are broadly defined and fewer in number, search results for
tags will be larger, but using the search results (image gallery
window) to find a smaller subset of images can be quite fast. Physical
file organization is preserved: image files located together in their
directories will also appear together in search results. <br>&nbsp;

      <br><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

      </span>Images
downloaded from the internet often contain tags. These of course have
no organization and are collectively chaotic. If you use a managed tag
system, it is best to review such images and clean up the tags to
conform with your system, or delete them. Whatever tags are present
will be automatically added under the category "nocatg". If you notice
strange tags in your tag list, use Search Images by tag to find the
images needing tag deletion or renaming. <br>
&nbsp; <br><span style="font-weight: bold;">Random Tag System</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">You
may prefer to invent tags as needed with no particular system in mind.
Or you may already have thousands of tags, making a conversion to a
managed tag system difficult (but not impossible, given a function to
mass convert tag names). In this case, you can simply type tags into
your images, creating new tags as needed. There is still a limited
capability to keep tags organized: existing tags matching the
characters you input are shown as soon as there are only a few possible
matches. Example: you type "lan" and a list of existing matching tags
is shown: landscape, landscapes, Langley ...&nbsp; If one of these is
your intention, you click on it to select the tag. If not, you keep on
typing and eventually press Enter to create a new tag. When searching
images for tags, you can type desired tag names or pick them from the
list of available tags. Available tags matching the first few letters
you type are shown, and you can pick from this list. You cannot search
for a tag that does not exist in your images. <br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;"></span>&nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="edit_metadata"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Edit
        Metadata </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 852px; height: 463px;" alt="" src="images/edit-metadata.jpg" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    The menu Metadata &gt; Edit Metadata is used to edit the most
      frequently used metadata: image date and time, rating, caption, comments, and
      tags. The dialog initially shows existing data for the current image.
      After making additions or changes, press [Apply] to update the image
      file. There is no file versioning for metadata changes
      unless you do this yourself by saving a new version and then modifying
      the metadata. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Existing tags are shown in <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Image Tags</span>. Available tags are shown in the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Defined Tags</span> window
      below. One of these tags can be added to the image by clicking it. A tag can be deleted from the image by clicking it in <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Image Tags</span>. Tags recently added are shown in <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Recent Tags</span>. This is a
      convenience to make adding tags to a new batch of images easier,
      assuming that many of the same tags will be used repeatedly. Point and
      click the same way. <span style="text-decoration: underline;"></span><br>
<br>
If the list of defined tags is long, it may be easier to type the desired tag into <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Enter New Tag</span>. Existing tags matching what you have typed so far will appear in <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Matching Tags</span>,
and you can point and click one of these to add the tag to the image.
If the input tag is new, press Enter when the tag is complete. It will
be added to the image and to the list of defined tags under the
category "nocatg". <br>
<br>
If you are using tag categories, you can select a category, and only
those tags will be shown in the list of defined tags. If your tags list
is huge, this can reduce the list to a manageable size for pointing and
clicking.<br>
<br>
The date of the image, if available, is shown as <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Image Date</span>. This may be entered if missing, or changed. You can enter
      a full date in the format yyyy-mm-dd or a shorter format yyyy or
      yyyy-mm. A missing month / day is logically equivalent to 01/01 when
      used as a low limit for searching, or 12/31 when used as a high limit.
      The [Prev] button fills-in the date from the previous data entered.
      This is to allow easy dating of a series of images. If time is
      important, you can include a time using the format <span style="text-decoration: underline;">hh:mm[.ss]</span>. You may enter an optional <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Stars</span> rating for the image. The
      dialog remains open if you navigate to a new image, and the data is
      updated from that image. The [Apply] button writes the data to the
      image file and to the metadata index file used for searching images. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;

    <span style="font-weight: bold;"><br></span><span style="font-weight: bold;">Manage
        Tags </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This dialog starts from the
      button [manage tags] in the Edit Metadata dialog. You can also assign
      categories to tags to help organize them and locate them more quickly
      when adding tags to images. They are optional and they play no role in
      tag searching: only the tag is stored in an image, not
      its category. Typical categories are people, places, things, events,
      scenery, buildings, art, etc. To add a new tag with a new category,
      enter the category and the tag, then click [create]. The category can
      be left blank and the tag will be assigned to "nocatg". To assign a tag
      to a different category, click a category (bold text) or enter a new
      one, click the tag, and press [create]. The tag will move from the old
      to the new category. To delete a tag, click the tag and press [delete].
      Tags used in images but not assigned to a category will appear under
      "nocatg". <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Note:
      a newly created tag is appended to the end of the tag list for its
      category. The next time fotoxx is started, all categories and their tag
      lists are sorted alphabetically, except that "nocatg" is always last. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Use the [orphan tags] button to
      list tags that are defined but not assigned to any images. These may be
      deleted if no use is planned. <br>
&nbsp; <br>
<table style="text-align: left; width: 816px; height: 197px;" border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
  <tbody>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a name="edit_any_metadata"></a><br>
      <span style="font-weight: bold;">

      Edit Any Metadata<br>
<img style="width: 224px; height: 132px;" alt="" src="images/edit-any-metadata.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"></span><br>
This is a dialog for editing any EXIF or IPTC metadata. Enter the
      desired key name and press [Fetch]. Change the returned data, if any,
      and press [Save]. The metadata is updated. You may enter the key name
      in lower case and with or without spaces between the words, e.g. "Bits
      per Sample" and "bitspersample" will both work. To see all present keys
      and data, use <a href="#view_metadata%22">View Metadata (long)</a>.<br>


      &nbsp; </td>
    </tr>
  </tbody>
</table>
&nbsp; <br>

      <a name="delete_metadata"></a><br><span style="font-weight: bold;">

      Delete Metadata</span><br>

      Specify the key name to delete, or select <span style="text-decoration: underline;">All</span>. The metadata is
      deleted. Use <span style="text-decoration: underline;">All</span> to clean an image of any identifying information
      that might be in there. Some keys are not deletable, e.g. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">File Name</span>.<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="batch_tags"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Batch
        Add / Remove Tags <br>
<img style="width: 438px; height: 375px;" alt="" src="images/batch-add-tags.jpg" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
</span>

    When adding tags to a large
      number of images having many of the same tags (i.e. the same event or
      subject), use this function to speed up the process. In the dialog, use
      the [select files] button to open a gallery window with thumbnail
      images from which you can select the image files (<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#gallery_selection">link</a>). After selecting files, specify
      tags to add to the images by clicking tags in the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Defined Tags</span> list.
      If you need to create new tags, use the [manage tags] button as
      described above. When done specifying image files and tags, press
      [proceed] to add the tags to the image files. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Removing tags works much the
      same way: select the image files and the tags to remove. You can add
      and remove at the same time if the images to process are the same ones.
      To replace tags, specify the new names in the add tags list and the old
      names in the remove tags list. To get a list of images having specific
      tags (which you want to remove or replace), use the <a href="#search_images">Search Images</a>
      function to find the images, then start this function and use
      the [select files] button to add all the image files that you just
      found, or select any subset. <br>&nbsp;
<br>
If you are using tag categories, you can select a category, and only
those tags will be shown in the list of defined tags. If your tags list
is huge, this can reduce the list to a manageable size for pointing and
clicking.<br>

<br>
<a name="batch_rename_tags"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Batch Rename Tags</span><br>
With this function, you can rename any number of tags and apply these
changes to your entire image collecton. Prepare a text file with a list
of tag names and their replacements. Each line has a pair of names
separated with a comma (old tag name, new tag name). When the function
is started, you will be asked to open this file. The list of tag names
is output to a popup scrolling window, followed by a list of images
that have any of the tag names to be revised. Inspect this list
carefully. If OK, press [proceed]. The update rate is around 500/minute
on a strong computer. The next time Fotoxx is started, the image index
function will update all thumbnails for the same images, because the
file modification date has changed. <br>
&nbsp; <br>
<a name="batch_metadata"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Batch Add/Change Metadata</span><br>
<img style="width: 561px; height: 283px;" alt="" src="images/batch-metadata.jpg" vspace="5"><br>This
function can revise metadata for multiple image files. You can add new metadata, revise existing metadata, and
delete metadata. Use the [select files] button to open a gallery window
with thumbnail images from which you can select the image files to be
processed (<a href="#gallery_selection">link</a>).
Enter metadata key names and values to be assigned, or leave the value
blank to delete this key. Press [apply]. You will get a
confirmation dialog (above right) and you can proceed or cancel at this
time. The [Short List] button presents a list of commonly used key
names. Click one of these to insert it into the first empty key name
field in the dialog. This list comes from the file&nbsp; <span style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">/home/&lt;user&gt;/.fotoxx/metadata_short_list</span>,&nbsp; which you can edit to add other keys to the list. The [Full List] button provides information on how
to get a list of all available key names. <br>
&nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="geotags_overview"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Geotags
        Overview </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Modern cameras can record the
      location of each photo, using an internal GPS receiver. Latitude,
      longitude, city and country are recorded in the EXIF metadata of the
      image JPEG or RAW file. The Fotoxx Edit Geotags function (immediately below) allows
      location data to be entered or revised for any image. The Fotoxx <a href="#search_images">Search
      Images</a> function can find images by location, including an optional
      range: e.g. find all photos taken within 30 km of London. Locations may
      also be specified by clicking on a map. There are two functions that
      can find all images from a specified location or region: <a href="#images_by_location">Images by Geotag</a>: find all images for a country, a country and city, or
      a country, city and date range. Images by Map Location: click on a map
      to show all images within a range of the clicked location. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="edit_geotags"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Edit Geotags</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 418px; height: 158px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/edit-geotags.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>

The
      dialog displays the location data for the current image, if any. The
      live display is updated when a new image is opened. For an image with
      missing or incorrect location data, enter a city name and use the
      [Find] button to either complete the data in the dialog, or get a list
      of matching cities to choose from (e.g. London, United Kingdom and
      London, Canada). Partial matches are found, so you can usually enter a
      leading substring, e.g. "hono" for Honolulu. Use the [Apply] button to
      enter the data into the EXIF metadata for the current image, and also
      into the metadata index file for later searching by location. If the
      data is
      revised in the dialog (spelling of city / country, or revision of
      latitude / longitude), this will take precedence for future city
      searches. Use the [Prev] button to fill the dialog data with the last
      location used. If the [Find] button does not find a city (it is not
      present in any other image), you can use the [Web] button to find the
      city and location data from an internet web service (MapQuest Open for
      now, but this could change). The location data is completed and returned
      into the dialog. These names are not standardized and there are many
      duplicates, so check the returned data for reasonableness and change
      the spelling and capitalization if needed. The [Apply] button will add
      the location data to the image, and this location will be available for
      future use by using the [Find] button. If the [Web] button fails, you
      can manually find the city in the internet and enter the location data
      into the Edit Geotags dialog. Pressing [apply] will add the data to the
      current image and make the location available for future use. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Here are two web sites to
      look-up a city / country (there are many others):<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;&nbsp; <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="http://www.worldatlas.com/aatlas/findlatlong.htm">http://www.worldatlas.com/aatlas/findlatlong.htm</a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


       &nbsp;&nbsp; <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="http://brainoff.com/geocoder/">http://brainoff.com/geocoder/</a>
      <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


     <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Blank the latitude and longitude
      if you want to save only the city and / or country name in the image
      file. If the latititude / longitude data is changed from the values
      returned by [Find], these values are saved and will be used from now on
      for new entries for this city. Previous images with the same city are
      not revised. You can use <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Images by Geotag</span> (see below) to find
      all images for a city, and <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Batch Add Geotags</span> (see below) to change the
      latitude / longitude for all of them. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Note:
      If the location name is not a city (e.g. Yellowstone Park), simply use
      this name for the City input.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Note:
      Non-English locales: If a comma is used for a decimal point in latitude
      / longitude, this is accepted but converted to a period internally. The
      web service returns periods. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    
        Note: If a city is saved without latitude / longitude, there
      will be no "red dot" to mark the city on a map, and finding photos for
      this city by clicking on a map will not work (see below, <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Images by Map
      Location</span>). The other method to find photos by city (<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Images by Geotag</span>, see below) will still work. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    The [Map] button
      changes to world maps
      view mode. Zoom-in to the area you need and click on a map position.
      The closest known city (within the specified range) will be selected.
      Use [Apply] to save the location into the image file. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    For a series of photos made in
      the same location, you can quickly add location data. After getting the
      location data for the first image, use the [Next] button to open the
      next image, then the Edit Geotags [Prev] button to fetch the previous
      location data, then the [Apply] button to save into the current image
      file. If there are many photos, you can use <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Batch Add Geotags</span> (see
      below) to quickly update all of them.<br>
&nbsp; <br>


    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 716px; height: 188px;" border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
  <tbody>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Summary</span>:<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Open an image
      file and select the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Edit Geotags</span> menu.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Enter (or
      change) a city name (possibly abbreviated) in the dialog.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Use [find] to
      find the city and auto-fill country, latitude, longitude.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


     &nbsp; +&nbsp; If there are
      multiple matches, choose from the list.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


     &nbsp; +&nbsp; If there are
      too
      many matches, add more letters or supply the country and try again.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


     &nbsp; +&nbsp; If there are
      zero matches (not found), try the [Web] button (country is required).<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


     &nbsp; +&nbsp; If still not
      found, add more letters to the city.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


     &nbsp; +&nbsp; If still not
      found, use one of the above web services and input the data manually.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Use [apply] to
      update the image file and make the location available for future use.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Open the next
      image (use the [prev/next] button if appropriate).<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


     &nbsp; +&nbsp; Use the [prev]
      and [apply] buttons to add the same location data again, if wanted. 
    </td>
    </tr>
  </tbody>
</table>
&nbsp; <span style="text-decoration: underline;"></span><br>
<table style="text-align: left; width: 816px; height: 233px;" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="2">

      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="batch_add_geotags"></a> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
            Batch
              Add Geotags</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
            <img style="width: 405px; height: 175px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/batch-add-geotags.jpg" align="left" hspace="8" vspace="5">With
              this function, you can select many images and add the same location
              data to all of them. Use the [select files] button to select the image
              files from a gallery window (<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#gallery_selection">link</a>). Then get the location data as
              described above in <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Edit Geotags</span>. Press [proceed] to start the update
              process. Use this function also to correct city / country spellings or
              latitude / longitude data, or to fix inconsistencies. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
          </td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>

    &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="images_by_location"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Images by Geotag (report)</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 758px; height: 165px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/geotag-groups.jpg" vspace="5"> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This is a fast way to find all
      photos made in a given country or city and country. In the dialog,
      select the desired level of grouping: by country, by country and city,
      by country and city and date. In the last case, you can select a date
      range for grouping of images having nearby dates. A number N will group
      images with dates that are N days or less apart from other images in
      the group (i.e. gaps are &lt;= N days).<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    A popup window shows all cities
      found in the image geotags, and the dates of photos taken in those
      cities. The count of photos taken is also shown. In the above example,
      9 photos are from Grossglockner starting Oct. 19, 2005. Click on a line
      in the window to get a thumbnail gallery of those images, and from
      there you can click on any image to view or edit. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;&nbsp;

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"> <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="search_images"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Search Images (report)</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Use the Search Images function
      to find images having any desired metadata. A metadata index file is
      used
      for searching, which makes it possible to search thousands of images
      per second. The index contains a subset of the EXIF and IPTC metadata
      in the image files. Some of this data is automatic, created by the
      camera. Other data, such as tags and star ratings, can be added by the
      user. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    An example search: find all
      images dated 2006 or later, rated with 4 stars or more, having tag
      "buildings" and geotag "Dresden". The output report for this search is
      shown here:<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 598px; height: 576px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/search-images-metadata.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">&nbsp;

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Search Images
      Dialogs</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 765px; height: 554px;" alt="" src="images/search-images.jpg" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    The main dialog is on the left.
      The Geotags dialog appears if the [geotags] button is used to select
      location data, and the Metadata dialog appears if the [other] button is
      used to select metadata that is not available in the main dialog.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    In the main dialog, select which
      images to search, either <span style="text-decoration: underline;">all</span>
      (the entire image database) or <span style="text-decoration: underline;">current</span>, meaning the images in the current gallery list (can be a directory,
      album, or the results of a prior image search). Then choose what
      to do with the matching images
      found: <span style="text-decoration: underline;">new set</span> means replace the current set with the images found, <span style="text-decoration: underline;">add</span> means add them to the current set, and <span style="text-decoration: underline;">remove</span> means remove them
      from the current set. To remove images, you must search the current
      set. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Select the desired <span style="text-decoration: underline;">report
        type</span>. The gallery report is a
      page of thumbnail images, as long as needed to hold all the images that
      match the search criteria. The metadata report has both thumbnail
      images and a list of metadata items beside each thumbnail. These are
      some standard items (date, rating, tags, geotags, captions, comments)
      and any items you added in the metadata selection dialog. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Enter your search criteria.
      Select desired tags, dates, star ratings, text (comments, captions) and
      file or directory names. Available tags are shown in <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Defined Tags</span> and can be chosen with point and
      click. Use the radio buttons <span style="text-decoration: underline;">all</span>
      or <span style="text-decoration: underline;">any</span> to indicate if all or
      any of the given values must be present for an image to be selected.
      Press the [proceed] button to
      perform the search. Matching images are displayed in gallery view mode.
      Choose images to view or edit by clicking the thumbnails. Navigate this
      set of searched images using the navigation buttons in the gallery view
      window, or the [Prev/Next] button in the file view window. You can
      save the searched images as a permanent album, which can be
      further edited to add or remove images (see <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#manage_albums">Manage
      Albums</a>). <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br>
If the list of defined tags is long, it may be easier to type the desired tag into <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Enter Search Tag</span>. Existing tags matching what you have typed so far will appear in <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Matching Tags</span>,
and you can point and click one of these to add the tag to the search
list. If you type a tag with no match (it does not exist in any
image), the list of matching tags will be empty. <br>
<br>
If you are using tag categories, you can select a category, and only
those tags will be shown in the list of defined tags. If your tags list
is huge, this can reduce the list to a manageable size for pointing and
clicking.<br>

<br>
A <span style="text-decoration: underline;">date range</span> may
      be entered to
      restrict the search to images within the date range. The format is
      yyyymmdd. Images are selected which have a date on or after the first
      date, if present, and on or before the second date, if present. Missing
      month/day default to 01/01 for the low date limit and to 12/31 for
      the high date limit. Times may optionally be specified using the format
      yyyymmddhhmm. Missing times default to 00:00 and 23:59.&nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    A pair of <span style="text-decoration: underline;">star ratings</span>
      may be entered to
      restrict the results to images having a star rating within the given
      range. A missing low value implies no stars, and a missing high value
      means the highest rating, 5 stars. <br>

      <br>

      If <span style="text-decoration: underline;">last version only</span> is
      checked, image files with multiple versions will be filtered to include
      only the last version of each file. This depends on the Fotoxx version
      naming convention: The original file name is normally filename.ext, and
      edited versions are filename.v01.ext, filename.v02.ext, etc. If no
      versions are present, the original file is selected. Otherwise, the
      last available version is selected. If this convention is not followed,
      then this option will do nothing. <br>

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Image directory and file names
      may also be searched. In the field <span style="text-decoration: underline;">search
        files</span>, enter any number of names used for your image directories
      and file names, separated by blanks.&nbsp;An input of [ egypt cairo ]
      would match all image directory or file names containing either of
      these strings. Name matching is not sensitive to case, and substrings
      will also match. <br>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Image comments and captions may
      also be searched. Enter the words to search for in the dialog <span style="text-decoration: underline;">search
        text</span> field, separated by
      blanks. These will be matched to every word in the comments and
      captions of all images, and matching images are selected. Substrings
      will also match. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    The radio buttons <span style="text-decoration: underline;">all</span>
      and <span style="text-decoration: underline;">any</span> apply to tags, text, and file
      names. You can select images having ALL the entered strings, or ANY of
      the entered strings. Example: if the search file field contains [egypt
      cairo] and <span style="text-decoration: underline;">any</span> is selected, then image files with either of these
      names within the directory or file name would be selected. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Geotags
        Dialog</span> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    The [geotags] dialog selects
      images by location. Enter a city name and press [find] (as described in
      Edit Geotags) to get country and latitude / longitude added
      automatically. Enter a kilometer range to determine the max. distance
      of images from this location to be included. If latitude / longitude
      and kilometer range are present in the dialog, these are used to locate
      images by latitude / longitude. If you want to search only by city and
      / or country name, erase latitude / longitude and leave the city and /
      or country. Use the [map] button to change to map view. Click on the
      selected map to set a latitude / longitude to search. You may enter
      "null" for city, country, or latitude / longitude to find images
      lacking these geotags.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Search
      Metadata Dialog</span> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    You may use this dialog to
      search for metadata items not present in the main dialog. The items
      available for any given image file can be shown using <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#view_metadata">View Metadata</a><a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#view_metadata"> (long)</a>. These include camera make
      and model, exposure time, F-number, ISO, metering mode, focal length,
      shooting mode, etc. etc. You can enter shortcut names like
      "exposuretime" instead of "Exposure Time". You may also enter match
      criteria, if wanted, so that only the images with matching metadata are
      reported. For example, if you enter "model" with the match value
      "DMC-FZ28" (my Panasonic) then only the images taken with this camera
      will be reported. You can also enter multiple match values for one key,
      separated by blanks.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Performance</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    If no extra metadata to report
      is entered, then thousands of images per second are searched and
      reported (assuming a strong PC). If extra metadata is entered, the
      search performance slows to something like 90 images per second. This
      is because the image files are being read to extract the metadata not
      included in the metadata index. For good performance, always use dates,
      file names, etc. to maximize the use of the metadata index and minimize
      the number of image files that must be read. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    There is a separate topic on <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#organizing_images">image
      organization options</a>. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;&nbsp;
    <br>

    &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a name="select_area_menu"></a><br>
<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src="../icons/areas.png" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><big><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Area
      Menu</span></big><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="area_overview"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Overview
    </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Edit functions normally apply to
      the entire image, but it is possible to edit part of an image (an
      "area") and leave the rest unchanged. If an image area has been
      selected, then most edit functions will work only within this area.
      Some functions ignore a selected area. An area may be selected before
      starting an edit function, or while an edit function is active. The
      selected area is immediately active, prior edits are retained, and
      future edits will apply only within the area. If another edit function
      is started, the selected area remains active, so it is possible to
      carry out a series of edits on one area. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    "Layers" in Photoshop and Gimp
      are "areas" in Fotoxx. Instead of selecting something from the image,
      making a separate layer from the selection, performing edit functions
      on the layer and finally merging the layers, you select something in
      the image and perform edit functions on the selection, with WYSIWYG
      feedback during the edit. Areas can also be saved to a file, opened and
      pasted into other images, and edited there. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="select_area"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Select
        Area</span> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 452px; height: 308px;" alt="" src="images/select-area.jpg" vspace="5"><br>
The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Select Area</span> dialog is
      started with the menu Areas &gt; Select. Select one of the 8 methods
      (explained below). Each method selects image areas in a different way.
      You can change methods at any time, and the selected areas are
      accumulated. An outline of the selected image area(s) is shown as you
      add or remove areas from the selection. The [Finish] button is used to
      make the area ready for subsequent image edits within the area. The
      [Hide] button removes the area outline, giving you better visibility of
      image edits and area edge blending. Use the [Show] button to show the
      area outline. The select area dialog can be exited and re-started later
      to modify an existing area or start a new one.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Line Drawing
      Color</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    The
color used for the mouse selection circle and the area outline can be
changed at any time by clicking one of the color buttons. This allows
you to maintain good contrast and visibility, regardless of the
brightness or color of the background image. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Methods</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    The following methods are used
      to enclose one or more image spaces that will belong to the final area.
      These methods may be used in any sequence to define spaces that are
      either joined or detached. 
    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 747px; height: 261px; font-family: sans-serif;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">

      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>&nbsp;Rectangle</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Drag the mouse to
              enclose a rectangular area.</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>&nbsp;Ellipse </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Drag the mouse to
              enclose an elliptical area.</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>&nbsp;Freehand Draw &nbsp; </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Drag and click the
              mouse to draw lines that outline an enclosed space.</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>&nbsp;Follow Edge&nbsp; </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Click or drag along
              the edge of an image object to draw lines that follow the edge.<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Replace </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Drag the mouse near
              an area edge-line to move the edge to the mouse. </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>&nbsp;Select area <br>

&nbsp;within mouse &nbsp;&nbsp; </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Left / right drag
              to select / unselect all pixels within the mouse circle. <br>


              &nbsp;Selection is independent of color. </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>&nbsp;Select one matching<br>

&nbsp;color within mouse </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Click on the image
              to select a color. Left / right drag to select / unselect pixels <br>


              &nbsp;inside the mouse circle that match the selected color within
              "match level". </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>&nbsp;Select all matching<br>

&nbsp;colors within mouse </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Left / right drag
              to select / unselect pixels surrounding the mouse that match <br>


              &nbsp;the color of any pixels inside the mouse circle, within "match
              level". </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Controls for mouse<br>

&nbsp;selection methods<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;"mouse radius" sets
              the size of a selection circle around the mouse pointer.<br>


              &nbsp;"match level" sets the color match (0-100%) required for pixel
              selection.</small></td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    The following paragraphs explain
      the details of each method. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Rectangle </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Drag the mouse from one corner
      to the opposite corner of the desired rectangular area to select. A
      rectangle is drawn to enclose the area. Right-click to delete and start
      over. Repeat the process to select more rectangular areas. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Ellipse</span> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This works the same as rectangle
      selection, except that the area enclosed is an ellipse. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Freehand Draw</span>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Drag the mouse (left button
      down) to draw a freehand (curvy) line, or left-click to connect a
      straight line from the last point drawn to the point clicked. Continue
      around the target area until it is surrounded with connected curves and
      lines. Right click to remove previous lines (mistakes). A right click
      will remove the previous clicked or dragged line, up to 50 pixels.
      Right click repeatedly to remove more. A new clicked line will always
      connect to the end of the previous line. A new dragged line will
      connect to the previous line if it is started close to the end of that
      line. If it is started elsewhere, a disconnected line will be drawn.
      You can start a new drag from far away and draw back to meet the
      previous line. If a clicked line connects to an undesired point (i.e.
      you don't want to connect to the last line drawn), right click to erase
      it and then use drag to start a new sequence of lines. A right-button
      drag can be used to erase small segments: right-drag closely along a
      line to erase it, then left-drag to re-draw the line. At the end, an
      area must be fully enclosed, with no gaps. Lines that overlap a little
      at the ends are OK. Gaps can be difficult to
        find and correct, so work at 100% image size or greater and be
      careful. A series of lines automatically connected with left clicks
      will not leave gaps, but deviation from this sequence is likely to
      create gaps. To reduce the possibility of gaps, use deliberate overlaps
      when manually connecting lines.  <br style="color: black; font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Follow Edge</span> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    High-contrast pixels (likely
      object edges) between the last point drawn and a newly clicked position
      are found and connected. This is effective for clear edges that are not
      too irregular. Fuzzy and ragged edges may not work well and freehand
      draw will be needed if high precision is necessary. The rules for
      connecting lines are the same as explained above. Dragging the mouse
      instead of clicking works like freehand draw.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Replace</span> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Drag the mouse near and along an
      existing area edge-line. The line will be erased and redrawn at the
      mouse pointer. This is a faster way to make a small adjustment in an
      existing line.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Select area
      within mouse</span> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Left click or drag will select
      the pixels enclosed by the mouse circle. A right click will unselect
      the last selection (repeat to unselect more). A right drag will
      unselect the enclosed pixels. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Select one
      matching color within mouse</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Click on the image to select a
      color. The color is shown on the color button. You can also use the
      button to set a color directly. Left / right drag to select / unselect
      pixels within the mouse circle that match the selected color within
      <span style="text-decoration: underline;">match level</span>. Adjust the match level down / up to match more / fewer
      pixels. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Select all
      matching colors within mouse </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Left / right drag to select /
      unselect pixels inside the mouse circle. Pixels beyond the mouse circle
      are also included if they meet these conditions: 1) their color matches
      any color inside the mouse circle, within the current <span style="text-decoration: underline;">match level</span>. 2)
      they are within <span style="text-decoration: underline;">search range</span>
      of the mouse pointer. This is a factor
      of mouse radius, e.g. if mouse radius is 20 and search range is 3, then
      the search range is 60 pixels from the mouse pointer. Drag the mouse
      over new areas you want to include. Watch the selected area expand into
      areas with colors matching those inside the mouse circle. If you go too
      far, right click to remove the last selection. Repeat if needed to
      remove more previous selections. Reduce the radius or increase the
      match level to gain finer control - the selection will expand more
      slowly and stay closer to the mouse circle. A small radius and high
      match level can be used to follow along an edge and select pixels up to
      the edge with good precision. Change to a larger radius and / or lower
      match level to select larger areas after the fine work is complete.
      Right drag acts as an unselect: pixels inside the mouse circle and
      matching pixels within the search range are unselected. If a selection
      goes too far, it is often easy to correct this by unselecting from
      outside the selected area. You may need some practice to get a feeling
      for this and be able to work efficiently. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Mouse Radius
      and Match Level</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    These two controls apply only to
      the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">select within mouse</span> methods described above. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Mouse radius</span>
      defines the size of a circle around the mouse pointer. Pixels within
      the circle are selected, or they provide a set of colors for matching
      and selecting pixels outside the circle. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Match level</span> defines a degree
      of match (0-100%) to select pixels based on their color and brightness.
      0 means anything matches, and 100 means a perfect match is required. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br>

    The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">firewall</span>
      checkbox can be
      used to stop the search wherever already-selected pixels are met. Use
      this if the border of an area has already been defined and you want to
      stay within this border. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Summary</span>
    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 719px; height: 65px; font-family: sans-serif;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">

      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>&nbsp;
              left drag </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>select pixels inside
              mouse circle and those with matching colors within search range </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>&nbsp;
              right click </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>undo
              previous selection, repeat to unselect more </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>&nbsp;
              right drag </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>unselect pixels inside
              mouse circle and those with matching colors within search range </small></td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Blend Width</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Edits made within an area can be
      blended with the surrounding image over a distance called <span style="text-decoration: underline;">blend
      width</span>. At the edge of the selected area, the image is the original
      (unedited) image. At a distance of <span style="text-decoration: underline;">blend width</span> from any edge inside
      the area, the image is the edited image. For distances in-between, the
      pixels are a mix of original and edited pixels with a gradual
      transition. Use the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Blend Width</span> control to set the blend width for the
      current or subsequent edit functions. Zero blend width gives a hard
      edge to the area edit. Increasing blend width makes the edges of the
      edit more gradual and harder to distinguish from the original image.
      Changing the value for the first time after editing an area will cause
      the edge distance to be calculated for each pixel in the area. This is
      normally fast (a few seconds), but it may take minutes if the area is
      large and has a complex geometry (a very long edge). Whenever an area
      is re-edited or inverted, the edge calculation is discarded and must be
      repeated if blending is wanted. If the edge of a selected area is
      within 4 pixels of the image edge, it is no longer considered an edge
      for blending. If a selected area includes a portion of the image edge,
      and you do not want blending along this edge (the normal case), be sure
      the edge of the area is within 4 pixels of the image edge. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Edge Creep</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    An area that has been finished
      can be expanded or contracted in 1-pixel steps. The area remains
      finished, but <span style="text-decoration: underline;">blend width</span> is no longer valid and must be repeated if
      needed. This can be helpful to reduce edge effects when an area
      selected by matching colors is edited in a way that changes its
      brightness. Selection by color may leave a narrow band of underselected
      or overselected pixels along an edge where color has become mixed with
      background. Expanding or contracting the area a pixel or two can
      produce a cleaner looking edge. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Show / Hide</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Use [Hide] to hide the area
      outlines. This is useful when editing the image / area, to better see
      the effects of the edit without interference from the area outlines.
      Use [Show] to show the outlines and resume editing the area. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Finish</span><br>

      <img style="width: 280px; height: 178px;" alt="" src="images/select-finish.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5">When you are finished selecting
      the enclosed spaces, use the [Finish] button to complete the process. A
      popup dialog will ask you to click the mouse inside each enclosed space
      in sequence. This action launches a search for all pixels within the
      enclosed space, and these are mapped and saved. The enclosed space is
      temporarily colored so you can see exactly what part of the image is
      being selected. The dialog will show the status of the search,
      "success" or "outline has a gap". If there is a gap in the outline, an
      attempt is made to show where the gap is: you will see a line coming
      out of the colored space to meet the edge of an imaginary rectangle
      enclosing the space. You may be able to follow this line back to the
      gap, but if the area is convoluted finding the gap can be difficult.
      Each use of [finish] will produce a different picture that may lead you
      to the gap. Carefully inspect the outline of the area, close the hole,
      and use [Finish] again. An area is not effective for edits until it is
      successfully finished. Any enclosed area can be selected, even those
      not explicitly outlined - if you have a donut with a hole, you can
      select the donut, the hole, or both. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Areas selected using one of the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">select within mouse</span> methods are automatically finished whenever you
      click inside any enclosed area. These areas are mapped during the
      selection process, whereas areas selected with one of the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">line
      drawing</span> methods are mapped only when clicked. <br>

      <br>

      If you select any of the four <span style="text-decoration: underline;">extend
        to corner</span> options, the area outline is automatically extended to
      the corner from drawn lines that meet the image edges. This avoids the
      work of drawing the area outline along the image edges to the corner.
      Example: to select the sky, draw the boundary line between sky and
      ground, meeting the left and right edges of the image. Then select the
      upper left and right corners in the Finish dialog. The entire sky area
      will be selected, without having to outline the rest of the sky. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Disable /
      Enable</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Disable the current area and
      keep the data so that it can be re-activated later. This allows you to
      alternate edits within a selected area and edits for the entire image. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Invert</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This function inverts an
      existing area: the entire image is selected except for the existing
      area. Using the function two times returns the original selected area.
      Inverting a selected area invalidates the edge calculation which will
      be repeated if edge blending is selected. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Unselect</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Discard the current area
      permanently. <br>
&nbsp;
      <br>

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="area_show_hide"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Area
        Show / Hide</span> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Show or hide the outline of the
      current area. Hiding the area is useful when the area is being modified
      with one of the edit functions. This makes it easier to judge the
      effects of the edit. These are also available as buttons in the Select
      Area dialog. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="area_enable_disable"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Area
        Enable / Disable </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Disable the current area and
      keep the data so that it can be re-activated later (Enable menu). This
      allows you to alternate edits within a selected area and edits for the
      entire image. These are also available as buttons in the Select Area
      dialog. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="area_invert"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Area
        Invert</span> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Invert an existing area: the
      entire image is selected except for the existing area. Using the
      function two times returns the original selected area. Inverting a
      selected area invalidates the edge calculation which must be repeated
      if edge blending is desired. This is also available as a button in the
      Select Area dialog. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="area_unselect"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Area
        Unselect</span> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Permanently discard the current
      area. This is also available as a button in the Select Area dialog. <br>
&nbsp; <br>
<a name="area_copy_paste"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Area Copy and Paste</span><br>
A selected area can be saved to a cache file using the menu Select &gt;
Copy Area. This area can be pasted into the same or another image using
Select &gt; Paste Area. Click and drag to position the
area. The dialog controls can be used to resize, rotate, and change the
brightness of the pasted area. The edge blend control allows you to
blend the area edges into the background image if wanted. <br>
&nbsp;

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="area_open_save"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Area
        Open and Save</span> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
A selected area can be saved to an image file using the menu Select
&gt; Save Area File. You are asked to supply a file name. A PNG file is
created. The PNG file has an alpha channel (a 4th 'color') for
transparency information. The image is a rectangle enclosing the
selected area. Selected pixels are opaque, and others are transparent.
These files reside in&nbsp;
/home/&lt;user&gt;/.fotoxx/saved_areas&nbsp; by default, but you can
save them anywhere. <br>
<br>
Use the menu Select &gt; Open Area File to paste a saved area onto the
current image file. The background image will show through the
transparent parts of the pasted area. Click and drag to position the
area. The dialog controls can be used to resize, rotate, and change the
brightness of the pasted area. The edge blend control allows you to
blend the area edges into the background image if wanted. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <span style="text-decoration: underline;"></span>&nbsp; <br>&nbsp;

       <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a name="edit_menu"></a><br>
<img style="width: 36px; height: 36px;" alt="" src="../icons/edit.png" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><big><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Edit Menu</span></big><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="trim_rotate"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Trim (Crop)
      and Rotate
      Image</span> (key T)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 812px; height: 263px;" alt="" src="images/trim-rotate.jpg" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This function is used to remove
      unwanted image margins, and / or to rotate an image to level or upright.<br>

      <br>

      When the dialog opens, a <span style="text-decoration: underline;">selection rectangle</span> is placed over the
      image. The areas outside this rectangle are darkened and represent the
      parts of the image that will be removed. Drag any corner of the
      rectangle to move that corner. The dialog box shows the current width /
      height ratio of the selection rectangle. If the box lock
        ratio is checked, then moving
      one corner of the rectangle will also move the opposite corner to keep
      the same ratio. You can also drag from the middle of the rectangle to
      shift the whole rectangle without changing its dimensions. You can use
      the width and height spin buttons to adjust the pixel dimensions (or
      type-in new values), and the selection rectangle will adjust to these. <br>

      <br>

      You can use the keyboard arrow keys
      to move a corner of the selection rectangle in 1-pixel steps. The last
      corner moved with the mouse is the one that is moved with the keyboard.<br>

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    The [Max] button
      resets the trim
      rectangle to the full image size (useful if you want only to rotate the
      image). The [Invert] button will
      invert the width / height ratio (e.g. 2.0 to 0.5). The [Prev]
      button retrieves the width
      and height values last used for a previous image (useful for setting
      multiple images to the same size, e.g. to fit a monitor or beamer). <br>

      <br>

      The [Auto] button will
      automatically set the trim rectangle to omit black margins left over
      from composite and warp functions. These
      functions leave black margins
      where images did not overlay or were bent away
      from the edge. [Auto] tries
      to find a maximum rectangle that does not overlap any of the black
      margin areas. This may or may not be the desired margins, so you can
      keep them or move them with the mouse before committing with the [Done]
      button. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    The six <span style="text-decoration: underline;">ratio buttons</span>
      allow you to choose a
      preset width / height ratio. You can change the ratio button names and
      the corresponding ratios with the button [customize] which starts a new
      dialog shown on the right. Enter desired button labels in the first
      row, and corresponding width / height ratios in the second row (the
      default names are the same as the ratios, except for "gold"). The
      [gold] button uses the golden ratio, about 1.62:1. You do not have to
      keep it.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    To level
        a tilted image, use the mouse to drag the right edge up or down
      until the image looks level. Use the 90º
      and 180º buttons to upright
      an
      image made with the camera turned. The degrees
      control can be
      used to set any angle, -180 to +180 degrees. No resolution is lost with
      90 degree rotation. For other angles, the loss of resolution is about
      1/2 pixel. The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">auto-trim</span> option
      automatically cuts off the edges (making them perfectly horizontal and
      vertical) when an image is rotated a small amount to make it level. <br>

      <br>

      A <span style="text-decoration: underline;">left-click</span> on the image will add vertical
        and
        horizontal guide lines to help with image leveling. Use
      <span style="text-decoration: underline;">right-click</span> to remove them. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a name="upright"></a><br clear="all"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Upright</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 331px; height: 92px;" alt="" src="images/upright.jpg" vspace="5"><br>

      This dialog is a faster way to
      upright an image that is turned 90 or 180 degrees.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

     The Upright button will take
      the correct action automatically if the image EXIF data is correct
      (normally yes). This function is available in the right-click popup menus for the main
      image window and gallery thumbnails.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

     &nbsp;&nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="voodoo"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Voodoo1</span>
      (key V) <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This is a fast automatic image
      enhancement with limited capability. This is sometimes effective and
      "good enough" for rapidly processing many photos. There is no dialog -
      the modification is simply done when the menu is selected. Reject the
      change with the [undo] button if desired. The modification consists of
      a slight flattening of the brightness distribution, an expansion of the
      brightness range if less than the full range is used, and a slight
      increase in the color saturation, more for darker areas of the image
      than brighter areas. The effect is sometimes minimal or even negative. <br><span style="font-weight: bold;">

      Voodoo2</span><br>

      This is an alternative automatic enhancement, using the <a href="#zonal_flatten">zonal flatten</a>
      method described below. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

     &nbsp;&nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="retouch_combo"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Retouch Combo</span>
    (key R)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This function handles all
      aspects of adjusting image brightness and color: overall brightness and
      contrast, brightness curves (overall and per color), color saturation,
      color temperature, white balance and black level. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 262px; height: 415px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/retouch-combo.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5">&nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    brightness curves, overall and
      by RGB color<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    x-axis is initial brightness,
      y-axis is revised brightness<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This example shows a reduction
      of brightness for <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    darker image areas, and an
      increase for brighter areas.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br>

      <br>

      <br>

      <br>

      Use the sliders for brightness and contrast to optimize<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    the image. This may be adequate
      for most photos.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    To fine tune brightness and
      contrast, edit the curves<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    using the mouse. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 746px; height: 227px; font-family: sans-serif;" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0">

      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>amplifier<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>increases or decreases
              the effect of the brightness edit curves<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>brightness<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>moves the entire curve up
              or down<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>contrast<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>moves the curve lower and
              upper parts in opposite directions<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>low color / high<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>increases or decreases
              color saturation<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>warmer / cooler<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>adjusts color temperature
              (reddish &lt;--&gt; blueish)<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>dark
              areas / bright<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>apply color changes to
              darker / all / brighter image areas <br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>brightness distribution<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>show a brightness
              distribution graph in the curve edit window<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>click for white balance<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>enables the mouse to
              click on a black point or gray / white point<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Settings File<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>dialog settings can be
              saved in a file and loaded later for use with other images<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    After making initial adjustments
      using the sliders, you can fine tune brightness and contrast by editing
      the curves with the mouse to change which parts of the image have
      increased or decreased brightness or contrast. The ALL curve adjusts
      all colors, and the RGB curves adjust individual colors. Use ALL first,
      then make revisions using RGB. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

     Dark -
      Bright</span> image areas<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This modifies the operation of
      the color adjustments to affect primarily darker or brighter image
      areas. Leave in the middle to adjust all areas equally. <br>

      <br><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

      Brightness Distribution</span><br>

      If checked, a brightness distribution graph is drawn inside the curve
      edit window. The graph is live and changes as the dialog controls are
      changed. The edit curve overlays the graph and may still be edited.<br>

      &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Click for white balance or black level</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    If checked, mouse clicks on the
      image are used to set a black point and / or white balance (otherwise
      clicks on the image will zoom the image as usual). If you click on a
      fairly bright gray or white spot on the image, this will be used as a
      white balance set point, and the image RGB colors will be shifted to
      make this spot pure gray or white. This is the easiest way to correct a
      photo with an overall color tint because of bad lighting. You can use
      the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">warmer-cooler</span> slider after clicking, and this correction will be
      added to the prior result. If you click on a very dark spot on the
      image, this will be used as a black set point, and the image RGB colors
      will be shifted to make this spot black. This is one way to reduce
      fogginess in a photo, or make the background sky look black instead of
      gray in an astronomy photo. The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">All</span> curve base node will
      be shifted to the right to reflect the new black point.<br>

      <br><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

      Settings File</span><br>

      Load button - load all dialog settings (including the curves)
      from a file chosen by the user<br>

      Save button - save all dialog settings to a file chosen by the user<br>

      This can help speed up processing when the same or similar settings can
      be used for multiple photos made under the same conditions.<br>

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Buttons</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Reset - set all controls back to
      a neutral position - image is also reset<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Prev - set all controls to the
      values used for the previous image<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Done - finish the edit, close
      the dialog, save the control settings<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Cancel - cancel the edit, reset
      the image, close the dialog<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    You can use the [Prev] button
      when processing a series of images made under the same lighting and
      therefore needing the same or nearly the same adjustments. <br>

      &nbsp;&nbsp;
      <br>

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="britedist"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Adjust
      Brightness
      Distribution</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 571px; height: 208px;" alt="" src="images/adjust-britedist.jpg" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">With
this function you can directly alter the shape of the brightness
distribution. Move the sliders and watch the image to find the optimum
settings.<br>
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Cutoff</span>: If the
distribution is low or zero at the dark or bright end, you can stretch
the distribution to make it extend more into the dark or bright end, or
both.<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;"><br>
Flatten</span>:
      This is a fast and easy way to compensate for a common limitation in
      photos: the brightness range is inadequate, or areas of the image have
      nearly the same brightness and details are lost. Pixel brightness is redistributed so that each brightness level is
      more equally represented. Technically, the brightness distribution is
      made more uniform (flatter). You can flatten any or all three ranges of brightness.<br>
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Stretch</span>: The selected
low / mid / high brightness region is broadened, which necessarily
squeezes adjacent areas. For example, if you broaden the low brightness
region, darker areas of the image will have more contrast at the
expense of mid- and high brightness areas.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;

     <br>

    
    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 831px; height: 698px;" border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">

      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a name="zonal_flatten"></a><br><span style="font-weight: bold;">
            Zonal Flatten</span><br>

            <img style="width: 372px; height: 442px;" alt="" src="images/zonal-flatten2.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"><img style="width: 268px; height: 160px;" alt="" src="images/zonal-flatten1.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
            Zonal Flatten enhances visible detail in areas having
            poor contrast. It is similar to <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Flatten</span>, described above,
            but is more effective for an image already having a wide overall
            brightness distribution. The revised brightness for a pixel is
            based on the brightness distribution for nearby
            zones.  A larger zones value calculates new pixel values from closer
            areas. Flatten controls the
            strength of the effect, and deband
moderates darker or brighter image areas. This function can amplify
noise in uniform areas like sky. If the deband control is insufficient
to correct this, use <a href="#select_area">Select Area</a>
            and <a href="#denoise_image">Denoise</a> to fix the noisy areas.
            Alternatively, use Select Area
            beforehand to select sky (or other areas to omit) and then invert the
            selection prior to using Zonal Flatten. <br><br clear="all"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">
Technical Explanation</span>
            (optional)<br>
            The image is divided into area zones according to the input zone count. Each pixel is adjusted based on
            the 9 closest zones, the 3x3 zones surrounding the zone of the pixel.
            More zones means smaller and closer zones. The brightness of a pixel is
            compared to the brightness distributions of the nearby zones, and the
            brightness is adjusted up or down in the direction that would flatten
            the distribution if the pixel were really a member of the nearby distributions. The influence of
            the 9 zones are weighted based on their distance from the pixel being
            calculated. The influence of the leftmost zones goes to zero for a
            pixel on the right edge of its zone. The same is true for the topmost
            zones, etc. This prevents abrupt transitions that could be
            visible. The nature of human vision hides the radical alterations in pixel brightness, since the eye also judges the
            brightness of a spot based on its surroundings. A larger number of
            zones will make each pixel brightness adjustment depend on areas closer
            to the pixel. <br>
          </td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>

    &nbsp;&nbsp;
      <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    
    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 844px; height: 524px;" border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">

      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="tone_mapping"></a> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
            Tone Mapping
            </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
            <img style="width: 250px; height: 268px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/tone-mapping.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5">Tone mapping
              increases the apparent
              brightness range of an image by increasing local contrast. It is
              especially useful to improve HDR images, but can also be applied to any
              image. Tone Mapping increases the contrast between nearby pixels
              without increasing the overall contrast. It relies on the nature of
              human vision: contrast within a small angle is perceived more strongly
              than contrast over a large angle. Tone mapping can bring out subtle
              details (low contrast) that would otherwise be hard to notice. Other
              methods can also be used: <a href="#retouch_combo">Retouch Combo</a> can increase the contrast for a
              selected brightness range (at the expense of others). <a href="#britedist">Flattening</a>
the brightness distribution can spread the available contrast
(brightness range) more evenly. These methods operate globally: all
pixels of a given brightness are processed the same. Tone mapping
processes pixels relative to surrounding pixels, and is more effective
at enhancing detail and the perceived brightness range.&nbsp;&nbsp; <br clear="all">
In the dialog, the
              graphic curve determines how much local contrast is increased depending
              on initial local contrast. The left end of the x-axis corresponds to
              low-contrast pixels and the right end high-contrast pixels. Raise the
              left side of the curve to increase the contrast of low-contrast pixels
              (but this will also enhance low-level noise). The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Amplify</span>
slider below the curve regulates the internal algorithmic calculation,
from no contrast amplification on the left to full amplification on the
right. If moved too far to the right, the image may show ugly
artifacts, so push it back until these disappear. The curve can be
dragged with the mouse and its effect on the image will show up in a
second or so (depending on image size and CPU speed). The Amplify
slider also needs time to show up in the image. If more contrast is
wanted, raise the curve. If uniform areas (e.g. sky) become mottled,
pull the left end of the curve down to reduce amplification for
low-contrast pixels. In some cases it will be best to select different
areas of the image and process them separately, e.g. more conservative
for sky, more aggressive for textured surfaces like stone walls and
vegitation. <br>
 </td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>

    &nbsp;&nbsp; <br>

    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 841px; height: 284px;" border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">

      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="resize_image"></a> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
            Resize
              Image</span> (also called rescale)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
            <img style="width: 358px; height: 235px;" alt="" src="images/resize.jpg" align="left" hspace="5">This
function resizes the image to a new pixel width and height. You can input the new
dimensions directly or choose a percent change.
Buttons are present for setting the new size to a simple ratio of the original size. Using one of these will minimize loss of
resolution. The [Prev] button recalls the previous size, a
convenience if multiple images are being set to the same size. If the
lock ratio box is checked, the current width / height ratio will be preserved if either width or height is changed.
The change is made immediately, but the image will look the same unless
it becomes smaller than the window. The
image file size in the top panel is not updated until the modified
image is saved.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
          </td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>

    &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="flip_image"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Flip
        Image</span> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Choose either horizontal or
      vertical flip from the dialog. The image is reversed (mirrored)
      vertically or horizontally. Repeating the flip restores the original
      image. Doing both a horizontal and vertical flip is the same as a 180
      degree rotation. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="add_text"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Add Text to
      Image</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 418px; height: 345px;" alt="" src="images/add-text.jpg" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">This function writes text directly on the
      image. Enter the text into the dialog. Multiple lines can be used.
      After entering the text, left-click the mouse where you want the text
      on the image. Click or drag to move the text elsewhere. Right click to
      remove the text. Use the [Font] button to select a different font. Use
      the [Size] control to increase or decrease the text size. Use the
      [Angle] control to change the slant angle of the text. The other
      controls allow you to provide a background color around the text, a
      text outline color, and a shadow effect. You can select the color and
      transparency for all of these. The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">width</span> control adjusts the width of
      outlines and shadows. The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">shadow angle</span> control sets the slant angle of
      the shadow. <br>
<br>
You can initialize the text from any available metadata in the image file. Enter the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">metadata key</span>
(e.g. "user comments") and press [Fetch]. Case and embedded blanks do
not matter, so you can abbreviate key names, e.g. "usercomments"
instead of "User Comments".<span style="text-decoration: underline;"></span><span style="text-decoration: underline;"></span><br>

<br>
The [Open] and [Save]
      buttons start a file chooser dialog with which you can load or save all
      text data from or to a file. All the items in the dialog are loaded or
      saved, so you can keep a collection of often-used text strings and
      settings. <br>
&nbsp;<br>
The buttons at the bottom work as follows:<br>
<table style="text-align: left; width: 635px; height: 158px;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
  <tbody>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Clear<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Clear the text and metadata fields to blank.<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Replace<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Image with added text replaces (overwrites) the current image file<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+Version<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Image with added text is saved as a new file version<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Next<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Open the next sequential image file and place the same text at the same position.<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Apply<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Complete the edit and start over. A new text string can now be added to the image. <br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
<tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Done<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Complete the edit and exit the dialog. The edited image file must be explicitly saved.<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Cancel<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Abandon the edit. Previous use of [Apply] is not reversed. <br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
  </tbody>
</table>
&nbsp;<br>
To add the same text to a series of images: prepare and position the
text, press [Replace] or [+Version], then [Next], then [Replace] or
[+Version], then [Next] ...<br>
&nbsp; <br>

    
    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 844px; height: 238px;" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="2">

      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><img style="width: 483px; height: 216px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/add-text2.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>

                Making
                a Watermark: <br>
Use a text transparency of 70% or more and a
              background transparency of 100%. The text should be faint but readable.
              To add a "relief" effect, use <a href="#select_area">Select Area</a> to put a box around the text
              and <a href="#embossing">Embossing</a> to give the text an
              appearance of depth. <br>

            </td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>

    &nbsp; <br>

      <a name="add_lines"></a><br><span style="font-weight: bold;">

      Add Lines / Arrows to Image</span><br>

      <img style="width: 396px; height: 290px;" alt="" src="images/add-lines.jpg" vspace="5"><br clear="all">This function writew lines or arrows directly on the image. Enter a line length and
      width into the dialog, and select an arrow head if wanted. Left-click
      the mouse where you want to place it on the image. Drag the ends of the
      line/arrow to position it on the image. Right click to remove it. The
      dialog controls allow you to provide a background color, an outline
      color, and a shadow effect. You can select the color and transparency
      for all of these. The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">width</span> control adjusts the width of outlines and
      shadows. The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">shadow angle</span> control sets the slant angle of the shadow.
      The [apply] button makes the current line / arrow permanent, so you can
      start a new one without leaving the dialog.&nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="paint_edits"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Paint
        Edits</span> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 274px; height: 207px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/paint-edits.jpg" align="left" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
Use this function in combination with some other edit function. Start
an edit function and leave the controls in a neutral position. Then
start Paint Edits. Specify a <span style="text-decoration: underline;">mouse radius</span> and <span style="text-decoration: underline;">power</span> factors for the mouse center and radius edge. The mouse pointer will be
      surrounded by a circle with the specified radius. When the mouse is
      dragged over an area of the image, the current retouch function is
      applied within the circle. The strength of the function is regulated by
      the power factors. Typically you will use a high value at the center
      and zero at the edge, meaning that the strength of the edit will be
      maximum at the center, changing gradually to zero at the edge of the
      circle. As you drag the mouse over the same area repeatedly, the edits
      are slowly accumulated. For example, if the edit function is Retouch
      Combo, and the brightness curve is moved upward (brighten), then the
      image will slowly brighten in the area where the mouse is dragged. This
      is called dodge and burn in some image editors.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Use the [undo] and [redo] buttons to monitor the change, which may be
hard to notice at first. Set the center power to 100 to make faster
changes (with less fine control). Use a left-button drag to weaken the
edit or ultimately erase it. When done using one edit function in one
or more image areas, use the [done] button on the edit dialog to
complete the edit. Use the [reset area] button on the Paint Edits
dialog to erase the active area that is now left over from the mouse
dragging. If you leave this area active and start a new edit function,
the results may be strange (the new function applies immediately to
previously painted areas). <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
A suggested approach is: (1) start an edit function and leave the
controls in a neutral position, (2) start the Paint Edits dialog, (3)
drag the mouse over the desired areas and watch the effect, (4) adjust
the edit function controls, (5) alternate between the previous two
steps. (6) Exit from the edit function, then from Paint Edits.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This method to "paint" edits incrementally can improve selected areas
of an image quickly and easily. It works with the following edit
functions: Retouch Combo, Zonal Flatten, Tone Mapping, Sharpen,
Denoise, Adjust HSL, Color Depth. Others may be added in the future. <br>

      &nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    
    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 847px; height: 371px;" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="2">

      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a name="leverage_edits"></a><br><span style="font-weight: bold;">

              Leverage Edits</span><br>

              <img style="width: 288px; height: 313px;" alt="" src="images/leverage-edits.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5">It is sometimes
              effective to apply an edit function "leveraged" by some image attribute, e.g. apply
              noise reduction to darker areas of the image while leaving brighter
              areas alone. To do this, use Leverage Edits. Choose brightness or
              contrast as the lever. This may be for a
              single RGB color or for all colors. The editable graph controls how
              subsequent edits are applied to the image. The x-axis is the
              selected lever, from minimum to maximum value. The y-axis value governs
              how strongly an edit function affects a pixel having the value on the
              x-axis. Example: apply tone
              mapping primarily to dark pixels: Start Tone Mapping, then start start
              Leverage Edits and drag the curve so that high values are on the left
              (dark pixels) and low values are in the middle and on the right (bright
              pixels). You can edit the leverage curve or the tone mapping curve while watching the resulting image. <br>
      <br>
This function can be used with the same list of edit functions listed in the Paint Edits topic above.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
          </td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>

    &nbsp; <br>

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="plugins"></a> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Plugins
    </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 423px; height: 138px;" alt="" src="images/plugins.jpg" vspace="5"><br>

    The Plugins menu is on the left. The top entry <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Edit Plugins</span> leads to
    the dialog on the right. In this dialog you can define menu names and
    associated commands for using other image edit programs within
    Fotoxx. These menus are added
      to the Plugins menu. The example shown is a menu
      named "auto-gamma" which starts the command "mogrify -auto-gamma %s"
      (an ImageMagick function). The "%s" is a placeholder where Fotoxx will
      insert the name of a temporary copy of the current file in Fotoxx. The
      called edit program must process the file and replace
      it with the edited version. Normally this is done by using the
      program's File &gt; Save menu. Afterwards, you can use the Fotoxx
      [Undo] and [Redo] buttons to
      check the results, perform additional edits with Fotoxx, or use [Save]
      to save the edited image. The image passed by Fotoxx to the external
      program is a TIFF file with 16 bits per color. Most programs can read
      this file but may use only 8 bits. When finished using the external
      program, save the image back to itself using the File &gt;
      Save menu, and then exit the
      program. Fotoxx will pick up the revised file and use it as though
      the edit had been done in Fotoxx. Note that in Gimp you must use the
      File &gt; Export menu to save the image back to the original input file
      (File &gt; Save produces an .xcf file). <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    To add a new plugin, input a
      menu name and the corresponding
      command in the Edit Plugins dialog and press the [Add] button. 
      Wherever %s is placed in the command, the
      file to process will be inserted. Some commands may expect an input and
      output file to be specified. In this case supply %s
      in both positions (the output
      file replaces the input file). You may omit %s if
      the command does not edit an
      image file. A warning is given, which you can ignore if this is really
      your intention.<br>

      <br>

      To modify an existing plugin, select the menu name from the drop-down
      list. The corresponding command will be shown. Modify the command and
      press [Add]. You can remove a plugin by selecting it and then
      pressing the [Remove] button. <br>

      <br>

      A few examples are provided in the initial Fotoxx installation:<br>

    
    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 494px; height: 52px;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">

      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace; font-weight: bold;">Menu
            Name<br>
          </td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace; font-weight: bold;">command
            line<br>
          </td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">Gimp<br>
          </td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">gimp %s<br>
          </td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">auto-gamma<br>
          </td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">mogrify
-auto-gamma
%s&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;
<br> </td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">Gthumb<br>
          </td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">gthumb %s<br>
          </td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>

    <br>

      The plugin menu is saved in the file&nbsp; /home/&lt;user&gt;/.fotoxx/plugins&nbsp;
      which you can modify
      with a text editor if desired. This is the only
      way to change the sequence of the menu entries. Be careful not to screw
      up the format.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;
    <br>

    &nbsp; <br>

    <a name="repair_menu"></a>&nbsp; <br>
<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src="../icons/repair.png" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><big><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Repair Menu</span></big> <br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    
    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 840px; height: 327px;" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="2">

      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="sharpen_image"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
            Sharpen Image</span>
            <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
            <img style="width: 278px; height: 261px;" alt="" src="images/sharpen.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5">This
              function has three methods to sharpen a blurry
              image.<br>
      <span style="text-decoration: underline;"><br>
Unsharp mask</span>: a fast and effective method also found in Gimp
              and other apps. A technical description can be found via Google.<br>
      <span style="text-decoration: underline;"><br>
Gradient</span>: steepens brightness transition areas directly, somewhat like
              tone-mapping. <br>
      <br>
      <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Kuwahara</span>: small neighborhoods of pixels above,
              below, left and right of a pixel are compared to each-other. The pixel
              is given the mean color of the neighborhood with the smallest variance
              in brightness. This forces pixels on a blurry edge to move to one side
              of the edge or the other. Edges are made very sharp, but details can be
              lost.</td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>

    <img style="width: 495px; height: 249px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/sharpen4.jpg" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">radius</span> value limits the
      distance over which pixels around an edge are changed. It should be
      small for images that are slightly fuzzy and larger for poorer images.
      <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Amount</span> controls the strength of the modification. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Threshold</span> suppresses
      changes to low-contrast pixels: a higher values reduces the
      amplification of low-level irregularities (image noise, uneven skin
      tones, etc.).<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">Choose the method, set the parameters, press [apply] and wait a few seconds to see the result. Make changes and
      repeat the process until satisfied. You can go back and forth among the
      methods to compare which is best for a given image. Use <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#select_area">Select Area</a> to operate on
      different parts of an
      image with different methods and parameters. <br>
&nbsp;
      <br>

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="blur_image"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Blur
        image </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This function can be used to
      blur or un-sharpen an image. Each pixel is mixed with neighboring
      pixels to reduce the differences, making edges fuzzy. Enter a value for
      <span style="text-decoration: underline;">blur radius</span> and press [apply] to see the results. A small value mixes
      each pixel with its nearest neighbors and larger values mix more
      distant pixels. The contribution from each pixel decreases with
      distance, so the nearest pixels have the greatest contribution. This
      function is useful to smooth mottled skin tones. You can use <a href="#select_area">select
      area</a> to limit the blur to a face or part of a face.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;

    <br>
<table style="text-align: left; width: 842px; height: 1073px;" border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
  <tbody>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="denoise_image"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">


    Denoise Image</span>
    - reduce noise<br>
       <img style="width: 288px; height: 288px;" alt="" src="images/denoise.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"><img style="width: 298px; height: 439px;" alt="" src="images/denoise2.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
This function reduces the noise in photos taken under poor
      lighting conditions, making uniform surfaces appear speckled. It also
      works for scanned prints, as in the example here. Multiple methods are
      provided because the best method varies with image noise
      characteristics. Mixing methods (using one and then another) is
      often helpful. Choose the method, set the radius or threshold parameter, and press [apply]. <span style="text-decoration: underline;"></span><span style="text-decoration: underline;"></span> Each new
      [apply] uses the modified image
      from the previous [apply], so each use will have increasing impact.
      With a large image, some methods may be slow. To save time,
    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#select_area">select</a>
      a small area and experiment with the
      different methods and settings until you make a decision, then apply
      the chosen method to the entire image.<br>

      <br>

      The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">dark areas</span> slider can be
      used to restrict the process to darker image areas, which are most
      prone to noise. If left at the right end, all areas are
      processed. Move it back to the left to process increasingly darker
      areas only. <br>

      <br>

      The [measure] button starts a
      dialog to measure the actual noise level. Click on the image to show
      the RGB noise levels in the area of the mouse. This must be a
      featureless area so that noise is the only variation present. A
      dark gray sky is a good source, or a badly out-of-focus area. To measure camera sensor noise, use a
      RAW image. A JPEG image has already been processed inside the camera to
      reduce noise. More information can be found in the <a href="#technical_notes">technical notes</a>.<br>

      <br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">

    Here is a short technical
      description of each method:<br>

      <small><small><small>&nbsp; </small></small></small><br>

    
    
      <table style="text-align: left; width: 720px; height: 218px; font-family: sans-serif;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">


      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Flatten 1</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>The highest and lowest
              pixel values within a radius are moderated slightly. </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Flatten 2</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Pixels are compared to
              the mean and sigma of pixels within a radius. <br>


              Those outside one sigma are moved slightly back toward the mean. </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: middle; white-space: nowrap;"><small>&nbsp;Median </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Pixels are set to the
              median value of their neighbors within a radius. </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Top Hat</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Detect outliers by
              comparison with a band of pixels at a distance. <br>


              The distance is increased in steps from 1 pixel to the radius limit.</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Wavelets </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Image brightness (with
              noise) over distance is converted into a series of wave functions that
              nearly sum to brightness and represent an approximation with less
              noise. </small></td>
        </tr><tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Threshold&nbsp; <br>
</small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Uses the threshold value
              to distinguish pixel noise from image features, and an algorithm to
              adjust initial pixel classifications based on neighboring pixel classifications. <br>
</small></td>
    </tr>

        
      </tbody>
    
      </table>


    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


    The wavelets algorithm was
      adapted from code found in a Gimp plug-in. <br>
The initial version was written
      by
      Dave Coffin for the program Dcraw<br>
      </td>
    </tr>
  </tbody>
</table>
&nbsp;&nbsp;

      <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="smart_erase"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Smart Erase</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 289px; height: 196px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/smart_erase.jpg" align="left" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">

    This function can be used to
      erase small objects that can spoil a good photo, such as power lines,
      trash on the ground, a sign, etc. The unwanted object is replaced with
      pixels taken from the surrounding area. This is sometimes very
      effective (side-effects almost invisible), and sometimes not. It works
      best for small or narrow objects in the photo. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Radius</span> controls the size of a circle around the mouse pointer,
      defining the area to select and erase. Drag the mouse to enclose all or
      part of the object to be removed. Left-drag selects and right-drag
      un-selects. Press [Erase] to erase the selected area, replacing the
      pixels with the nearest pixels from outside the selection. If the
      selection was not precise enough, use [Undo], adjust the selected area,
      and [Erase] again. Repeated selections and erasures will accumulate
      until you use [New_Area] to start a new selection. The prior erased
      areas are now fixed and [Undo] will only work for the current
      selection. As with all edit functions, the main menu buttons [Undo] and
      [Redo]
      can be used to review all changes. It is likely best to work with an
      image zoomed to 200% or more. The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Blur</span> control adds blur to the
      replacement pixels. This can reduce visible side-effects, since the
      replacement pixels may be sharper or have more contrast than the
      surroundings. Change the Blur setting and repeat the [Erase] button. A
      blur of 0.5 or 1 pixel is usually effective. The [show] and [hide]
      buttons can be used to show the outline of the current selection or
      hide it to better judge the results after erasing.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">&nbsp;

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="redeye_remove"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Red
        Eyes </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This function reduces the
      red-eye effect from electronic flash photos. Two methods are provided.
      The first is faster but may not handle difficult cases. The second
      method is more robust but also needs more time and care. To use the
      first function, left-click on a red-eye one or more times until
      satisfied. If the darkened area is too small or off-center, do a
      right-click to undo the change and then left-click more precisely on
      the center of the red-eye. If a red-eye cannot be fixed correctly,
      right-click to undo the change and then use the second method. The
      second method can better handle difficult cases where the red-eye is
      only slightly red and the color difference with the eyelids is too
      little for the automatic algorithm to distinguish. Place the cursor
      over the center of the red eye. Hold the left mouse button and drag the
      cursor down and to the right. A dotted ellipse will appear enclosing
      the red eye. Repeat if needed to get the red eye centered in the
      ellipse (roughly). Note that the shape of the ellipse depends on the
      direction of the drag, which can allow more precise enclosure of only
      the red-eye. Left-click inside the ellipse repeatedly while watching
      the red eye darken, and stop when it is dark enough. If you go too far,
      the eyelids may start to darken. Right-click to undo and repeat if
      necessary.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;

     <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="paint_clone"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Paint / Clone</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 341px; height: 265px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/paint_clone.jpg" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This function changes individual
      pixels by painting them with the mouse. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    If a <a href="#select_area">select area</a> is enabled, the
      painting is confined within the area. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Paint Color</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This <span style="text-decoration: underline;"></span>button allows you to
      pick a color, and shows the current color. You can also shift +
      left-click on the image to choose a color from the image. The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">paintbrush radius</span> control sets a circle around the mouse pointer
      which shows the area being painted or erased. Left drag on the image to
      paint with the current color. Right drag over a previously painted area
      to erase (gradually undo the painting). The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">transparency</span> controls
      determine how intensely the color is applied (or erased) at the center
      and edges of the circle. Zero transparency applies the full color
      immediately whereas a high transparency (90+) allows you to gradually
      change the color using multiple drags (analogous to spray painting from
      a distance). Erase also works this way: use zero transparency to
      immediately erase, and high transparency to erase gradually. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    NOTE: zoom the image to 100% or
      more when using a small brush. If the mouse steps are larger than the
      image pixels and a small brush is being used, some pixels may be
      skipped by the mouse and cannot be painted.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Copy From
      Image</span> (clone)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Instead of one fixed color for
      all pixels within the paintbrush radius, pixels are taken from
      somewhere else in the image. Shift + left click on the image to select
      the source area, then drag on the area to paint. The source area is
      painted over the dragged area. The transparency controls work as
      described above. This method can be used to erase an unwanted object,
      replacing it with background taken from elsewhere. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    The [undo-last] button removes
      the last paint or erase operation, and this can be repeated to remove
      many recent edits. Each new drag operation is a unit of work that can
      be separately erased. The memory for undo operations is limited to one
      gigabyte, which can be reached if you make many edits using a large
      brush (every change to every pixel is saved). It is useful to save the
      image after each satisfactory change to free this memory.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    The&nbsp;gradual paint
      option functions as already described. If you de-select this
      option, painting and erasing will be sudden instead of gradual. If you
      are painting within a <a href="#select_area">select area</a> with edge blending, the painted
      changes will be zero at the edges and 100% for pixels beyond the blend
      width from the edges. This works better if <span style="text-decoration: underline;">gradual paint</span> is not
      selected.<br>
<br>
<a name="paint_transp"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Paint Transparency</span><br>
&nbsp;<img style="width: 230px; height: 234px;" alt="" src="images/paint-transparency.jpg" vspace="5"><br>
This function can be used to paint transparent or semi-transparent
areas on an image. Such areas are useful in the Fotoxx Mashup function,
where images or background underneath a transparent area can show
through. Other image editors (e.g. Gimp) can also use transparent
areas. <br>
<br>
The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">paintbrush radius</span> control sets a circle around the mouse pointer
      which shows the area being transformed. Left drag on the image to increase the transparency, right drag to decrease. If <span style="text-decoration: underline;">gradual paint</span> is checked, the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">strength</span>
controls determine how rapidly the transparency changes at the center
and edges of the circle. If gradual paint is not checked, transparency
is set to 100% (left drag) or 0% (right drag) for the entire area
covered by the mouse circle. <br>
<br>
An image file having transparency information must be saved as a TIF or PNG file. JPEG files do not support transparency.<br>

      &nbsp;&nbsp; <br>

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="color_mode"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Color
        Mode </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Use this function to make a
      black and white or color negative, or convert a negative image into a
      positive image, or convert to sepia coloring (a modified black / white
      conversion for an aged photo effect). <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Select one of the four buttons:<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp; &nbsp; black / white
      positive - convert a color image to black and white <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; black / white
      negative - convert to black and white and reverse brightness<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; color
      positive - do nothing at all, or undo one of the others<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; color
      negative - replace each RGB color with its compliment <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; sepia -
      convert to a modified black and white for an aged photo effect <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Color negative: Each RGB color
      is replaced with the maximum value - the color value. For example, if
      the RGB colors (% of maximum) are 20/40/60, then the negative color is
      80/60/40. Doing this twice brings back the original colors. This
      produces complimentary colors as follows: red becomes cyan, green
      becomes magenta, and blue becomes yellow.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Sepia: This is like a conversion
      to black and white, but a shade of brown called sepia is added to the
      shades of gray. This makes a photo look like a very old photo from the
      early days of photography. Many cameras and photo edit programs have
      this feature. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

     &nbsp; &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 823px; height: 167px;" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="2">

      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="shift_colors"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
            Shift
              Colors</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
            <img style="width: 264px; height: 138px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/shift_colors.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5">This
              function can be used to correct
              colors or convert an image into
              false colors. Choose any of the three RGB colors and move the slider
              left or right from the center. One of the two other colors will be
              substituted in a graduated manner. For example, you can gradually substitute green
              or blue for the color red. The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">All</span> slider shifts all colors together.
              Do this first to find a first optimum, then shift the RGB colors
              individually.</td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>

    &nbsp;&nbsp; <br>

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="adjust_RGB_CMY"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Adjust RGB /
      CMY</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 439px; height: 140px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/adjust%20RGB.jpg" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This function is used to change
      overall brightness and contrast, or that of selected colors. The
      settings are retained within and across Fotoxx sessions, so this
      function can be used to process multiple photos made under the same
      lighting conditions and needing the same (or nearly) adjustments. Use
      the [reset] button to restore all inputs to neutral values.<br>

          &nbsp;&nbsp;  <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 631px; height: 101px; font-family: sans-serif;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">

      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Brightness</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Increase or
              decrease overall image brightness<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>+Red
              - Cyan&nbsp; etc.<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Increase or
              decrease the brightness of one color <br>


              &nbsp;and change complimentary color in the opposite direction<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Contrast<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Increase or
              decrease the overall image contrast<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Red, etc.<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Increase or
              decrease the contrast of individual RGB colors<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;
    <br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;"><a name="adjust_HSL"></a>

    <br>
Adjust HSL<br>
<img style="width: 277px; height: 245px;" alt="" src="images/adjust_HSL.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
</span>


      Change the color of an image or selected areas using an HSL
    color chooser. You can choose a <span style="text-decoration: underline;">color hue</span> and adjust <span style="text-decoration: underline;">saturation</span> and
    <span style="text-decoration: underline;">lightness</span> independently. This color is blended with chosen image
    colors using the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">adjustment</span> slider. 0% means no change and 100% means
    complete replacement. Select a <span style="text-decoration: underline;">color to change</span> by pressing the shift key and clickiing on the image. Color changes will center on this color. <span style="text-decoration: underline;"></span>All image colors are compared to the selected&nbsp;color and changed according to the degree of match. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Color match</span>
defines how close the colors must match: 0% means no match (all colors are
changed), 100% means only colors very close to the target color are
changed. You can move any slider and watch the changes in the live
image. This function is useful for replacing selected colors, e.g. an
overexposed sky (almost white) can be made to look realistically blue. This function can also be used with <a href="#select_area">Select Area</a> to change only selected image areas. <br clear="all">&nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="brightness_ramp"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Brightness
        Ramp </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 238px; height: 316px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/brightness-ramp.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This example shows brightening
      of the<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    upper right image quadrant.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">

    This function varies the
      brightness across an image, with the direction and magnitude of the
      brightness slope determined by editable curves. You can use this to
      compensate for uneven lighting or vignetting (darker image corners).
      The function dialog displays two editable curves, horizontal and
      vertical. The horizontal curve adjusts brightness horizontally, and the
      vertical curve adjusts brightness vertically. Move the curves in the
      directions labeled "+" and "‒" to increase or decrease the image
      brightness in the corresponding image area. To remove vignetting in the
      image corners, move both ends of both curves in the "+" direction while
      fixing the middle areas or even moving them in the "‒" direction. To
      brighten the upper right corner, move the right end of the horizontal
      curve and the upper end of the vertical curve in the "+" direction, as
      in the example above. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    If used with <a href="#select_area">select area</a>,
      the scales refer to the enclosing rectangle of the area instead of the
      whole image. Thus you can select an area of an image and apply a
      brightness ramp across the area. If the button <span style="text-decoration: underline;">All</span> is selected
      (default) then all colors are adjusted equally (i.e. brightness is
      adjusted). If one of the colors is selected, the image is adjusted for
      that color only, and the All curve is ignored. Any or all three RGB
      colors may be adjusted in this manner. You can use this to remove a
      color-caste that varies across an image or image area. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">

    &nbsp; <span style="font-weight: bold;"></span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
<table style="text-align: left; width: 793px; height: 422px;" border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
  <tbody>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="color_ramp"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
      <span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Color Ramp</span><br>
      <img style="width: 292px; height: 454px;" alt="" src="images/color_ramp.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
This function can be used to make complex color corrections, whereby
different parts of the image need different corrections. Select up to 9
control points on the image by clicking them with the mouse. The points
are added to the list in the dialog window, with the most recent point
at the top. The points are labeled A-I in the list and on the image
window. The current RGB values are shown (or EV or OD units if
selected). Change the RGB / EV / OD values in the dialog, and the image
will be changed to match. Each pixel in the image is influenced by all
the control points in the dialog, with the closer control points having
more influence than those farther away. The slider Blend determines how
widely the control points spread their influence. If delta is checked,
the values shown are the deltas (differences) from the original image.<br>
      <br>
      <br>
      </td>
    </tr>
  </tbody>
</table>


    &nbsp;&nbsp; <br>

    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 788px; height: 373px;" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="2">

      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="match_colors"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
            Match
              Colors</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
            <img style="width: 237px; height: 207px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/match_color.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
This
              function matches the colors in
              one image to those in another. A small spot, determined from a mouse
              click, is sampled from each image. The spot on the 2nd image will be
              made to have the same average color (RGB values) as the spot from the
              1st image. The factors used to make the RGB values the same are then
              applied to all the pixels in the 2nd image. The most common use is to
              remove a color-cast from an image by marking a spot on the image that
              should have a given color which was taken from another image.&nbsp; <br clear="all">
            Procedure: The dialog
              lists 5 steps to take in sequence. (1) Set a radius for the spot
              sample. The mouse cursor will have a circle of this radius which is the
              spot area that will be sampled. (2) Open the 1st image (press the
              [open] button for a file open dialog). If the current image is already
              the one you want, this step can be skipped. (3) Click on the image to
              take a color sample from the spot area enclosed by the mouse circle.
              You can change the radius and click again if wanted. (4) Open the 2nd
              image by pressing the [open] button. (5) Click on the image at the spot
              you want to match the spot color from the 1st image. The image colors
              will change within a second or two. You can change the radius and click
              on another spot if wanted, and the colors will change accordingly.
              Click the dialog [done] or [cancel] button to finish. </td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>

    &nbsp;
    <br>

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="color_profile"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Color
        Profile</span> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Use this function to change from
      the normal sRGB color profile to some other RGB color profile. If you
      have images with Adobe RGB color, you can change them to sRGB for
      display on a monitor using sRGB (normally the case). You may need to
      install ICC color profiles. In Ubuntu, the package names are <span style="text-decoration: underline;">icc-profiles</span> and <span style="text-decoration: underline;">icc-profiles-free</span>. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;&nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="remove_dust"></a> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Remove
        Dust </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 265px; height: 170px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/remove_dust.jpg" align="left" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
Images made from dusty scanned slides can have many small dark spots -
shadows of the dust on the slides. Historical photos from the internet
often have a similar problem. This function can be used to remove the
majority of such spots. Move the three sliders until the maximum number
of dust spots are painted red, then press the [erase] button to erase
them. Press [red] to bring back the red view, then you can adjust the
sliders again and press [erase]. The "spot size limit" slider limits
the size of the spots that will be erased. The "max. brightness" slider
sets a threshold for ignoring spots that are not dark enough. The "min.
contrast" slider screens out spots having low contrast with their
surroundings. This process is usually a compromise. If the settings are
not optimal, small features like tree leaves can be erased, or large
spots may be left in place. Different parts of the image may need
different settings, e.g. sky can be treated more aggressively than a
building wall. You can simply use Erase Dust multiple times with
different settings as needed to get all the dust spots. Or you can use <a href="#select_area">select area</a> to process the image in sections. If some spots are
      persistent, you can treat them manually with <a href="#smart_erase">Smart Erase</a>: set a small
      mouse radius and click on each spot to remove it. Spots from fibers
      (long and thin) are usually not removed automatically, but Smart Erase
      can be effective here. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="anti_alias"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Anti-Alias</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 511px; height: 214px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/anti_alias.jpg" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This function can reduce
      pixelation (aka "jaggies" or "stair steps") in a low-resolution image.
      Press the [apply] button to make the change, then [done]. The result is
      sharper than using the Blur function. The resulting image is 2x the
      size of the original. It may be useful to apply sharpening afterwards. <br>

        <br><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

        Note</span>: this tool is only effective for pixelation with
      single-pixel "steps". If the image has been resized larger (steps are
      larger than 1 pixel) the algorithm does not work. It thinks the steps
      are legitimate because they are big. Pixelation in photos normally
      occurs only when a photo has been reduced and then enlarged.
      Pixelation is not a problem with normal photography - lens blur is
      generally larger than the camera sensor pixel size.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">

    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="color_fringes"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Color
      Fringes</span> (chromatic abberation)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 664px; height: 217px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/color_fringes.jpg" vspace="5"> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This function is used to reduce
      chromatic abberation. Look carefully at the left photo, taken from
      inside a church. It has color fringes that were mostly eliminated in
      the processed image to the right (these images are 400% size and not
      very sharp). Color fringes can appear along high-contrast edges,
      especially in the outer image areas where lens distortions are usually
      greatest. To get rid of them, zoom the image to a maximum size and
      center on an area with color fringes. Move the slider controls slowly
      while watching the image, and leave them where the color fringes are
      minimized. To speed up the response time, <a href="#select_area">select</a> a small area first, optimize the color fringes in this area, then
      remove the area before pressing [done] so that the entire image will
      get the final corrections. The corrections are scaled so that the
      maximum correction is at the image edges and the correction at the
      center is zero. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="stuck_pixels"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Stuck
      Pixels </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 281px; height: 160px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/stuck_pixels.jpg" align="left" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">

    Camera sensors may have defects
      causing isolated pixels to be always bright or always dark. This may be
      one RGB color or all of them. I have seen a case where a group of 3x3
      pixels was always too red. This function can find such pixels in an
      image and repair them by substituting neighboring pixels. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Select the defect sizes to
      search for: 1 pixel, 4 pixels in a 2x2 block, or 9 pixels in a 3x3
      block. The defects found are surrounded by small circles which you can
      toggle between write, black and red. Zoom-in to inspect these and
      determine if they are real defects. Use the contrast control to
      precisely select the defects. If set too low, small high-contrast spots
      in the image may be erroneously selected. If set too high, real defects
      may be missed. Use the [apply] button to erase the defects in the
      current image. You can apply the function many times using different
      settings if needed. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    The currently shown (encircled)
      defective pixels can be saved to a file by using the [save] button.
      This file can be used later to fix the defects in any image made by the
      same camera: use the [open] button, select the saved defects file, then
      use the [apply] button to fix the current image. Using a saved defects
      file from one image to fix the defects in another image will only work
      if the two images have never been trimmed, or if exactly the same trim
      was applied to both images. This is necessary because the defective
      pixels in the two images must have the same locations. If more than one
      contrast setting or pixel group selection is needed to accurately find
      all the defects in one image, you can save the respective defect files
      and combine them manually into one file. Use any text editor for this. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    I suggest you make a test images
      to find defects: Make a photo of a paper sheet or blank wall that is
      underexposed to come out gray. This image can be used to find both
      bright and dark stuck pixels. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp; <br>

    &nbsp; <br>

    &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a name="bend_menu"></a>&nbsp;
    <br>
<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src="../icons/bend.png" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><big><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Bend
        Menu</span></big> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="unbend_image"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Unbend
        Image </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 495px; height: 509px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/unbend.jpg" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">

    Panoramas of nearby subjects
      (typically buildings or interior rooms) may show straight lines that
      are curved, or buildings that are slanted. Bending of the images is
      necessary in the panorama process in order for the images to fit
      together. For landscapes this may not be noticeable. The unbend
      function can be used to straighten the image. Vertical and horizontal
      dotted lines are drawn over the image, showing the unbend axes. Click
      or drag the mouse near the end of a line to move it. Input values for
      horizontal and vertical unbend and watch the effect on the image.
      Increase or decrease the values and repeat until satisfied. Move the
      axes to change the centers of unbending. The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">linear</span> values will slant
      the image left / right or top / bottom edges to remove slant. The
      <span style="text-decoration: underline;">curved</span> values will straighten the image curving that comes from making
      a panorama. See also <a href="#warp_image">Warp Image</a> for another method of correcting
      image curving and perspective.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">

     &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="fix_perspective"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Fix
      Perspective</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 407px; height: 282px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/keystone.jpg" align="left" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">

    This function can be used to
      straighten a photo made from an offset angle. The painting on the left
      is the original photo, taken from below and left of center, to reduce
      reflections. The painting on the right is the straightened version.
      This function can also be used to straighten a building photographed
      from below or from the side. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Click on the four corners of the
      tetragon shape that you want to make into a rectangle (in the above
      case, the four corners of the painting or frame), then select [apply].
      Use [reset] to go back and try again if needed. The clicked corners are
      labeled with small letters A, B, C, D. The upper left corner of the
      square enclosing the letter precisely marks the corner position.
      Clicking near a corner will move it to the new position. After the 4th
      corner is defined, a new click replaces the closest corner.<br>

      <br>

      You can use the keyboard arrow keys to move the corner markers in
      1-pixel steps. The arrow keys work on the last corner selected or moved
      with the mouse. <br clear="all">

      &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="warp_image"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Warp Image</span>
      (distort) <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 612px; height: 372px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/warps.jpg" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

     &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="warp_area"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Warp
        area</span> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This function can be used to
      make distortions within an image. You can select an image area and drag
      the mouse to stretch this area with respect to the rest of the image.
      The image is like rubber. If the mouse drag begins within the selected
      area, then the area is warped within its current boundaries - the
      movement is maximum at the mouse pointer and declines to zero at the
      edges of the selected area. If the mouse drag begins outside the
      selected area, the area edges near the mouse can be pulled out beyond
      the original area boundary. Many mouse drags of different lengths and
      directions can be combined to achieve the desired results. When
      finished, you can select another area and do some more warping, or
      select [done] to exit the function. The method used limits loss of
      resolution from repeated warps: for each warp step, the total movement
      of each pixel is accumulated and the original image is warped to the
      latest pixel positions. The pixels are interpolated to reduce jaggies
      and improve sharpness. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

     &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="warp_curved"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Warp
        curved </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This function is useful to
      correct perspective problems (see also <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#unbend_image">Unbend</a>). Drag the image from any position,
      using the mouse. The entire image will be pulled or pushed in the
      direction of the mouse, but areas near the mouse are moved more than
      more distant areas. You can straighten curved lines or deliberately
      curve the image. The control <span style="text-decoration: underline;">warp span</span> determines the radius of
      warping around the mouse. 1.0 means the full image is warped, and
      smaller values confine the warp to smaller areas around the mouse. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

     &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="warp_linear"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Warp
        linear </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This function is useful to
      correct perspective problems (see also <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#unbend_image">Unbend</a>). Drag the image from any position,
      using the mouse. This function works over a broader area than the
      curved warp and causes less image curvature. To minimize the addition
      of curvature, pull only on the image corners. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

     &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="warp_affine"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Warp
        affine</span> <br>

      This function can be used to warp an image in interesting ways. Drag
      the image from a corner or edge using the mouse. The changes are purely
      linear so straight lines remain straight. This transform is called
      "affine". Technical details can be found with Google. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

     &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="flatten_book"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Flatten Book
      Page</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 552px; height: 476px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/flatbook.jpg" align="left" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">

    This function can flatten a
      photographed page from a book. If the book is thick, the pages bend
      downward at the binding, and the photographed text is squeezed
      together. This function straightens the the
      page and unsqueezes the text. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Photo
      Procedure</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    First, make the photo as good as
      possible to minimize the needed corrections. The page curvature can be
      reduced by holding the book half-opened. Place the camera over the
      center of the page, so that the top and bottom edge curves look roughly
      equal. Use lots of illumination to increase the depth of field, to
      insure the curved-down part of the page remains in sharp focus. Two
      persons working together can photograph 1-2 pages per minute. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Fotoxx
      Procedure</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    First, trim the image, keeping
      all of the page but little more. Rotate the page if needed. Use <a href="#fix_perspective">Fix
      Perspective</a> to make the page more rectangular if needed. Start the
      Flatten function. Click the mouse along the top edge, creating visible
      dots at the clicked points. After 4+ points are available, a curved
      line is drawn through the points. Add more points and drag the points
      as needed to make the line conform closely to the page edge. Repeat for
      the bottom edge. Press [flatten] to flatten the page. The edges should
      now be straight (or straight enough). The text near the binding is
      still squeezed together. Unsqueeze the text by pulling the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">top</span> and
      <span style="text-decoration: underline;">bottom</span> sliders. The text is spread out in a way that is proportional
      the the slope of the top and bottom page edges, so the area near the
      binding is stretched the most. The [undo] button restores the
      unmodified image and the edited dots, which can now be adjusted. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">

    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;
    <br>

    &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a name="effects_menu"></a>&nbsp;
    <br>
<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src="../icons/effects.png" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><big><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Effects
        Menu</span></big> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="color_depth"></a><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif; font-weight: bold;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Color
        Depth </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This function changes the normal
      16 bits per RGB color (red, green, blue) to any value between 1 and 16
      bits per color. At 8 bits per color, there are 16.8 million total color
      combinations. At 4 bits per color there are only 4096 total colors. Use
      1-4 bits for an interesting "poster" effect. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="pencil_sketch"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Pencil Sketch</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 702px; height: 251px;" alt="" src="images/sketch.jpg" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This function transforms a photo
      into something like a pencil sketch. Dark pixels are aggregated into
      fewer pixels, leaving vacated areas brighter. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Contrast</span> can also be used
      as a proxy for dark pixels. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Threshold</span> can be used to filter the input
      image by brightness. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Clip Level</span> is used to filter the output to
      further reduce isolated or marginally dark pixels. Choose colors for
      foreground and background. Two algorithms are
      provided. Results may look more interesting with one or the other.
      Reducing the size of the input image may also give more
      interesting results. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="line_drawing"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Line Drawing</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 697px; height: 240px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/line_drawing.jpg" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">

    This function transforms a photo
      into a line drawing showing outlines of objects within the image. Edges
      (sharp transitions in brightness or color) in the image are brightened,
      and the rest of the image is darkened. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    There are three sliding
      controls. T<span style="text-decoration: underline;">hreshold</span>: how bright an edge must be in order to get
      enhanced, from "show no edges" at the low end to "show all edges" (even
      faint ones) at the high end. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Width</span>: width of the enhanced
      edges, from 1-pixel to about 5 pixels. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Brightness</span>: brightness of
      the image itself, from dark (show only the outlines) to full
      brightness. The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">black/white</span> checkbox converts the image from color to
      black and white, and the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">negative</span> checkbox makes a negative image
      (colors are replaced with their compliments). <br>

      &nbsp;
      <br>

      <a name="color_drawing"></a><br><span style="font-weight: bold;">

      Color Drawing</span><br clear="all">

    <img src="images/color_drawing.jpg" alt="" style="width: 259px; height: 488px; font-family: sans-serif;" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

     This function transforms a
      photo into a solid color image that looks like an illustration. The
      <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Threshold</span> slider separates the image into brighter and darker areas,
      with the boundary set at a brightness level determined by the slider.
      The other two sliders regulate the brightness of these two areas. At
      the settings shown here (Dark Areas pushed left, Bright Areas pushed
      right), the darker areas are black and the brighter areas as as bright
      as possible with intense coloration. If the sliders are moved to the
      opposite sides, the original image is restored. Move the sliders until
      the image is optimized. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

     This function can be used to
      clean up a smudgy blackboard or whiteboard image by separating the
      writing cleanly from the background (if the background smudges are
      weaker than the writing). It may help to apply Sharpen to the image
      beforehand, to increase the contrast of the writing. Use the unsharp
      mask method with a large radius. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">

    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="graduated_blur"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Graduated Blur</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 510px; height: 258px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/grad_blur.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">

     This is another function to
      blur an image, but it works differently. In the dialog, you specify a
      <span style="text-decoration: underline;">contrast limit</span> and a <span style="text-decoration: underline;">blur radius</span>. Only pixels with less contrast than
      the given limit are blurred, and the blur radius ranges from 1 to the
      given value for pixels with a corresponding contrast ranging from the
      given limit to zero. In short: low contrast pixels are blurred more
      than high contrast pixels. This can be used, for example, to smooth
      skin tones without blurring hair or reducing the sparkel in the eyes.
      Taken to extremes, it produces a "cartoon" effect, especially when used
      in combination with other retouch and effects functions.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">

    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="embossing"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Embossing</span><br>

      <img style="width: 354px; height: 310px;" alt="" src="images/embossing.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    
    This function transforms a photo
      into a simulated relief or embossed image. The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">radius</span> setting
      determines the feature size or level of detail. The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">depth</span> setting
      determines how deep the features go into the surface. The upper 60% of this image was embossed. <br clear="all">&nbsp;  <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="tiles"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Tiles
    </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This function transforms a photo
      into an array of large monocolor tiles. You can control the tile size
      and the thickness of the gap between tiles. This is also called
      "pixelate" or "pixelize". Use <a href="#select_area">Select Area</a> to confine the transform to a
      limited area, such as a face. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="dot_matrix"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Dots</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 308px; height: 235px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/dots.jpg" align="left" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This function transforms a photo
      into a array of dots, like a comic book picture or Roy Lichtenstein
      painting. The only control is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">dot size</span>. Also experiment with using
      color saturation, color depth, or other functions before and after
      using Dots. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">&nbsp;

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="painting"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Painting</span>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This function transform a photo
      into something looking more like a painting. It reduces the number of
      colors, maps each contiguous pixel area having the same color, and then
      consolidates smaller areas into adjacent larger areas having the best
      color match. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">color depth</span> sets the number of colors to use: 1 = 8 colors, 2 = 64 colors ... 5 = 32768 colors.<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">patch area goal</span> sets a lower limit for areas that will have their own
      color: areas smaller than this number of pixels will be absorbed into
      an adjacent area with the nearest color match.<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">req. color match</span> sets
      the minimum color match required for a smaller area to be consolidated
      into an adjacent larger area: 0 = don't care (maximum consolidation),
      100 = perfect match required (no consolidation).<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">borders</span> determines
      whether the colored areas will be delineated with a thin black border,
      like irregular tiles in a mosaic. After using this function, using the
      Embossing function can add interesting texture to the image. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="vignette"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Vignette</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This function is used to
      highlight or colorize an object or area within an image.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 582px; height: 285px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/vignette.jpg"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Click or drag the mouse on the
      image to change the vignette center, which is initially at the center
      of the image. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Select <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Brightness</span> to change the
      brightness of the image in a radial pattern: Adjust the left or right
      end of the curve to change the brightness of the center and edges of
      the image respectively. You can give a dark surround to a portrait
      face, or you can fix an image with darkened corners. The curve middle
      level corresponds to no change. Use lower values to darken and higher
      values to brighten. The example above gradually darkens the periphery
      of the image while leaving a broad central area unchanged. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Select <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Color</span> to add a chosen
      color to the image in a radial pattern. Curve values of zero represent no change, and higher values add the
      chosen color to the image. The highest value corresponds to 100% color. Use this function to
      add a color surround to an image, e.g. surround a face with a gradually
      increasing color. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="texture"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Texture</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 183px; height: 145px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/texture.jpg" align="left" hspace="5">This function adds a textured
      surface
      to an image or <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#select_area">selected areas</a> within an image. Radius determines
      the texture pattern size. Strength determines the intensity of the
      pattern, from almost invisible to dominant. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">&nbsp;

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="pattern"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Pattern<br>
<img style="width: 364px; height: 279px;" alt="" src="images/pattern2.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><img style="width: 364px; height: 206px;" alt="" src="images/pattern1.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style="font-weight: bold; font-family: sans-serif;">
</span>

    Add a background pattern to an
      image. A small image file (pattern file) is used to cover the current
      image by duplicating the file, like a tiled wall. This file can be a
      real pattern (e.g. an image of canvas cloth, a brick wall, a repeating
      geometry ...), or any other kind of image. The pattern is made
      semi-transparent, so that the base image appears to be printed over the
      pattern, or the pattern over the image. Many pattern files can be found
      using a Google search for "pattern image". Download some of these and
      trim them if needed to a size around 200-500 pixels. For convenience, add these to the supplied pattern files in <span style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">/home/&lt;user&gt;/.fotoxx/patterns</span>. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Use the [Browse] button to select a pattern file. The selected pattern will be tiled to cover the
      base image. The pattern is partly transparent so that the base image
      shows through. <span style="text-decoration: underline;"></span>Use <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Zoom</span> to grow or shrink the pattern size. There are two methods to mix the pattern with the base image. The pattern <span style="text-decoration: underline;">opacity</span>
can be set 0-100%. The base image is used to fill the unused opacity -
e.g. if the opacity is set to 30%, then the final image will be 30%
pattern and 70% base image. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Contrast</span>
is used to modify the base image brightness using the pattern
brightness as a template. The two parameters can both be used and mixed
in any ratio. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Width</span>
      and <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Height</span>
      are initially set to the size of the
      pattern file. You can adjust these smaller, which will cause less of
      the pattern to be used for duplication. If the pattern file contains an
      image that repeats at fixed intervals both horizontally and vertically,
      the [Calculate] button can be used to set width and
      height to match. The result will be a continuous pattern without any
      edge effects. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    If the pattern is irregular and
      edge effects appear where the duplicated patterns are joined, you may
      be able to improve this. Use <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Width</span> and <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Height</span> to revise which part of the pattern
      image is used. The two <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Overlap</span> values determine how much the
      duplicated patterns overlap at the edges, horizontally and vertically.
      Add some overlap to mask edge effects. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#select_area">Select Area</a>
      can be used to apply a pattern to
      part of an image, or different patterns to different parts. After
      applying a pattern to an image, it might be interesting to use <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#embossing">Embossing</a> or <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#tone_mapping">Tone Mapping</a> to add a 3-D
      effect to the pattern. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Useful pattern files in
      LibreOffice: <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="../../../../../usr/lib/libreoffice/share/gallery/www-back">/usr/lib/libreoffice/share/gallery/www-back</a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="mosaic"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Mosaic</span><br style="font-weight: bold; font-family: sans-serif;">

    Create a mosaic image using
      tiles made from all your images. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 307px; height: 140px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/mosaic.jpg" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 671px; height: 277px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/mosaic2.jpg" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Specify the tile size in pixels
      (e.g. 36 x 24) and press [Tiles]. Tiles will be created from all of
      your images (actually the thumbnail images are used since their small
      size makes the process run much faster). This may take some time (speed
      is over 10K images / min. on a strong PC). If you change the
      tile dimensions, press [Tiles] again to regenerate the tiles. This may
      work much faster since the images have been cached in memory by the OS.
      The generated tiles are saved to a file and loaded again the next time
      the Mosaic function is used. Regenerate the tiles only when new images
      have been added to your collection or if you change the tile size. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    After the tiles are created,
      press [Image] to convert the current image into a mosaic using these
      tiles. This takes only a few seconds. You can process additional images
      without regenerating the tiles. Tiles are chosen by matching the
      average tile color to the average image color at the tile position. If
      thousands of images are available and if the range of colors is good
      enough, the mosaic will turn out quite good. Use the mouse wheel (or
      CTRL+left click) to zoom-in on any part of the image to see the tile
      images.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Tile blending</span> slider will
      cause the image to be blended with the tiles, making it look better if
      the tiles are a bad color match. If the blending is less than about
      50%, the tiles remain almost as clear as before (the eye compensates
      the false tint). <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    After a mosaic is created, you
      can click on any tile to get a larger popup image. This is the full
      image for the tile, so you can drag the window as large as you like and
      it will remain sharp. A mosaic image can be saved like any other edited
      image, but if a saved mosaic is opened, clicking the tiles for a bigger
      image will not work. Regenerating the mosaic is quite fast, so do this
      if you want the popups to work. <br>
&nbsp;
      <br>

      <a name="custom_kernel"></a><br><span style="font-weight: bold;">

      Custom Kernel</span><br>

        <img style="width: 264px; height: 271px;" alt="" src="images/custom-kernel.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>

      Apply a custom convolution kernel to an image (a small matrix useful
      for blurring, sharpening, embossing, edge-detection, and more). The
      underlying technology is explained in <a href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kernel_%28image_processing%29">Wikipedia</a>.
      Input a <span style="text-decoration: underline;">kernel size</span>, a <span style="text-decoration: underline;">divisor</span>,
and fill-in the table values. The values can be saved into a file and
retrieved later by using the [Load] and [Save] buttons. [Reset]
restores the original status. [Apply] applies the kernel to the image,
and can be repeated for multiple applications. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">

    &nbsp; <br>

    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 790px; height: 331px;" border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">

      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="make_waves"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
            Make
              Waves</span><br>

              <img style="width: 468px; height: 310px;" alt="" src="images/make-waves.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style="font-weight: bold; font-family: sans-serif;">

              This function
              distorts an image into a wave pattern, as if it were being viewed
              through turbulent water. The dialog allows you to change the mean
              horizontal and vertical wavelengh, amplitude and variance. The
              "perspective" input allows the wavelengths to gradually lengthen from
              top to bottom. Like most effects, this function also works within a
              seleced area.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
            <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
          </td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>

    &nbsp;
    <br>

    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 784px; height: 179px;" border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">

      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a name="directed_blur"></a><br><span style="font-weight: bold;">
            Directed Blur</span><br>
            <img style="width: 190px; height: 160px;" alt="" src="images/directed-blur.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
            Pull a location on the image using the mouse. The area around the mouse
            will move with the mouse and become blurred in this direction, a
            "1-dimensional" blur. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Blur span</span>
            can be used to broaden or narrow the size of the area being blurred. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Intensity</span>
            determines the strength of
            the blur, from barely visible to completely blurred.<br>
          </td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>

    &nbsp;
        <br>
<a name="sphere"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Spherical Projection</span><br><img style="width: 467px; height: 250px;" alt="" src="images/sphere2.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5">&nbsp;<img style="width: 226px; height: 117px;" alt="" src="images/sphere.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
Make a spherical projection of an image. Drag the mouse on the
image to change the center of the projection (defaults to midpoint). The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">flatten</span> control modifies the projection gradually from a
sphere (left) to a flat image (right). The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">magnify</span>
control magnifies the resulting image up to 2x. If you want the margins
to be transparent, be sure to save the file as .png instead of .jpg (JPEG files do not support transparency).<br>
&nbsp; <br>
&nbsp; <br>

        &nbsp; <br>

        <a name="combine_menu"></a> <br>

<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src="../icons/combine.png" vspace="5"><br><big><span style="font-weight: bold;">

        Combine Menu</span>&nbsp;</big> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="HDR"></a> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    High Dynamic
      Range</span>&nbsp; (HDR) <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Combine (overlay) multiple
      images of the same subject with different exposure levels. The combined
      image can show improved visibility of detail in both the darker and
      brighter areas, in effect using pixels from the brighter images for the
      darker areas, and from the darker images for the brighter areas. Many
      digital cameras do exposure bracketing: take multiple shots in quick
      succession with different exposure levels. You can combine such images
      to make a better one. If the camera is adjusted manually between shots,
      take care to keep it level and aim at the same distant point. Some
      misalignment of the input images can be tolerated. If things move between
      shots, ghosting cannot be avoided.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 321px; height: 307px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/HDR-adjust.jpg" align="left" hspace="8" vspace="5">Select
      the HDR menu function and select up to 9 images, which must all have
      nearly the same pixel dimensions. The images are aligned and combined
      automatically. This needs 10 seconds to a minute or more per image,
      depending on image size and CPU speed. When done, the combined image is
      shown, along with a dialog for manual adjustments. The contributions
      from the input images are shown as a series of editable curves. The
      horizontal scale represents pixel brightness, from dark to bright. Each
      curve represents an image which contributes to the pixels. The image
      contribution at a given brightness level is proportional to the height
      of its curve at that level. The initial curve for the brightest image
      will be high on the left and low on the right, meaning a high
      contribution to dark pixels and a low contribution to bright pixels.
      The darkest image will be low on the left and high on the right, and
      the remaining images will be in-between. The curves can be edited by
      dragging them with the mouse. The corresponding image contributions are
      changed accordingly, and you can see the results in quasi-real-time in
      the output image. In general, the brightest image should have a higher
      contribution to the darker pixels, and the darkest image a higher
      contribution to the brighter pixels. You will likely need practice to
      become effective at working the curves. A faster and easier alternative
      may work as well: after the images are combined, ignore the curves and
      exit from HDR. Use various edit functions to refine the image:
      Brightness Distribution, Retouch Combo, and Tone Mapping. Select Area
      can be used to enclose any area in the image which needs more
      brightness, color, or local contrast, so you can apply different
      methods and parameters to different areas. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="HDF"></a> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

     High Depth
      of Field</span>&nbsp; (HDF) <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Combine (overlay) multiple photos of the same subject with different
focus settings from close to distant. Different parts of the subject
are in sharp focus in each image. Combine the images so that all parts
of the subject are sharp. This technique is most useful for extreme
close-ups. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Making the photos: choose a
      point for the center of the image. Aim the camera at a near object and
      depress the shutter button 1/2 way to set the focus on this object.
      Hold the button at the 1/2 position, aim the camera at the chosen
      center, and snap the photo. Now choose a farther object and do the
      same. Repeat with increasing focus distance. Hopefully each part of the
      subject is sharp in at least one photo. The camera position should be
      very nearly the same for all photos, which can be a challenge when the
      subject is very close. Camera movement can cause scaling and parallax
      problems (close objects shifted against distant objects). Such
      problems may be fixable later in Fotoxx, but this may require
      considerable time. It is better to avoid the problems. <br>

      &nbsp; <br>

    <img style="width: 232px; height: 170px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/HDF-paint.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5">Processing
      the photos: in Fotoxx,
      choose the HDF menu function and select up to 9 images. The images will
      now be aligned as well as possible. This needs 10 seconds to a minute
      or more per image, depending on image size and CPU speed. The output
      image is an even mix of the aligned input images. A small amount of
      camera movement between the photos is compensated, but this is limited,
      and parallax shifts are not compensated at all. When the alignment is
      complete, a dialog opens. You can select any input image and "paint"
      with the mouse on any area of the output image. This converts the
      original image mix to the single selected image for the area being painted.
      For each area or object in the image, choose an input image that is
      sharp in that area. The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">radius</span> of the paintbrush can set larger or
      smaller, so you can paint large areas quickly and control fine detail
      when needed. If you have overlapping near and far objects, time and
      patience will be needed to make all of them sharp. Misalignments can be
      corrected by selecting the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">warp</span> option in the dialog. The underlying
      images can then be dragged and warped with the mouse, and the composite
      output image is changed accordingly. The warp is limited to the area
      around the mouse. When a painted area is dragged, the corresponding
      image is automatically selected and dragged, while areas painted with
      other images remain fixed. Areas that have not been painted cannot be
      dragged. Move around to different areas and make incremental drags
      until all areas are aligned.&nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Suggested
        Workflow</span>: Using <span style="text-decoration: underline;">paint</span> mode, choose each image in sequence and
      paint all areas that look sharp in that image. Any boundaries that
      are not well-aligned will show up clearly as shifts in the edges of
      objects in the image. Some of these can be made unimportant by changing
      the image used for painting (if more than one image is sharp enough).
      Using <span style="text-decoration: underline;">warp</span> mode, make fine adjustments as needed to eliminate visible
      shifts. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="stack_paint"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Stack / Paint</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 259px; height: 136px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/stack-paint.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5">Combine
      (overlay) multiple photos of the same subject taken at different times.
      Remove tourists and cars that come and go between shots by painting
      them away with the mouse. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Making the photos</span>: Aim the
      camera at the same distant point and take multiple photos as tourists
      or cars move in front of the subject. Try to get at least one photo
      with each part of the subject not obscured by the moving objects. <br clear="all">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Processing the photos</span>: In
      Fotoxx, choose the Stack / Paint menu function and select up to 9
      images. The images will now be aligned as well as possible. This needs
      10 seconds to a minute or more per image, depending on image size and
      CPU speed. The output image is an even mix of the aligned input images.
      When the alignment is complete, a dialog opens. You can select any
      input image and "paint" with the mouse on any area of the output image.
      This converts the original image mix to the single selected image for the area
      being painted. For each area in the image, choose an input image that
      is free from the moving objects. The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">radius</span> of the paintbrush can set
      larger or smaller, so you can paint large areas quickly and control
      fine detail when needed. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="stack_noise"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Stack
        / Noise <br>
<img style="width: 289px; height: 143px;" alt="" src="images/stack-noise.jpg" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
</span>

    This function combines 2-9
      images (photos) of the same subject. The photos should be nearly the
      same, except for small offsets caused by a hand-held camera. If the
      photos were made with a very high ISO setting (low light conditions),
      the pixels will have considerable noise. By making many photos and
      averaging them, the noise can be mostly eliminated. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Making the photos</span>:
      Choose a point
      for the center of the image. Take several photos using the same center
      and being careful not to shift or rotate the camera too much. The more
      photos the better. Up to nine can be used with Fotoxx, but you can take
      more in order to have some to discard if they are not sharp, a common
      problem with low light conditions and long exposure times. <br clear="all">&nbsp;<br>
In Fotoxx, chose the Stack /
      Noise function and select up to nine images. They will be combined
      automatically and shown, and then a dialog will open. The initial
      output image is a combination of all the selected input images,
      averaged together. This means that the RGB values for each output pixel
      are the average of the RGB values for the corresponding input pixels. A
      few alternative tools can be used to possibly reduce the remaining
      noise a little more. The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">use median</span> button will change the output
      pixels from an average of the input pixels to the median of the input
      pixels (1-3 middle RGB values are averaged, depending on the number
      of images). This may or may not be better, so switch back and forth to
      compare (the screen update may need several seconds). The checkboxes
      for <span style="text-decoration: underline;">omit low pixel</span> and <span style="text-decoration: underline;">omit high pixel</span> will cause the lowest and
      highest RGB input values to be discarded before the average is
      calculated. This may help to get noise spikes removed from the mix.
      This has no effect if the median method is selected. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;

    <br>
<table style="text-align: left; width: 820px; height: 1121px;" border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
  <tbody>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="panorama"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
      <span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Panorama
        Image <br>
<img style="width: 242px; height: 261px;" alt="" src="images/panorama1.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"></span>This function stitches 2-4
      images together to make a wide image or panorama. The images must
      overlap by 15% or more, so that the program can find where they
      coincide and join them together. Start
      by selecting 2-4 image files.
      The images are initially joined and shown with a small transparent
      overlap. A pre-align dialog asks you to drag the images into rough
      alignment. Drag the images into the correct left to right order. The
      image to drag may overlap other images. To be clear about which image
      is being dragged, drag from near the center of the image. After the
      images are in the correct order, align each image to its left neighbor.
      It works best to proceed from left to right. Move an image horizontally
      and vertically into rough alignment with its neighbor to the left, then
      rotate the image if needed by dragging the bottom edge left or right -
      the image pivots around the mid-point of its overlap with the image to
      the left. The fastest method is to align the overlap middle region
      first, then rotate the right image if needed to bring the upper and
      lower overlap regions into alignment. Extreme accuracy is not needed.
      Use the [resize] button to get
      a bigger combined image after moving them closer together. The images
      should be correctly curved and fit together well. If they do not, then
      the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">lens mm</span> parameter (focal
      length, 35mm equivalent) needs adjustment. The curvature of the images
      changes as <span style="text-decoration: underline;">lens mm</span> is adjusted. The initial value is obtained from the
      EXIF data if available, and this is normally good enough. 
      You can measure and set <span style="text-decoration: underline;">lens mm</span> manually using the [search]
      button described below. If
      the images have no curvature (e.g. scanned or downloaded images), use
      the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">no curve</span> checkbox to set
      the lens mm effectively to infinity. <br>


    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


    If an image was trimmed so that
      the greater dimension (width or height) was reduced, then the EXIF
      focal length is no longer valid, and the EXIF initial value may not
      work well. A section of an image taken from the middle has an effective
      focal length greater than the original. Increase the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">lens mm</span> parameter until the images fit together reasonably
      well, or use the [search]
      button to make a more precise determination (described below).<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


    The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">no auto warp</span>
      button is normally
      unchecked. Its purpose is described below.<br>


    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


    Press [proceed] when
      pre-alignment is
      finished, and the program will do fine alignment and join the images.
      Internally, the images are shifted and rotated and the degree of match
      is evaluated. This is done with increasing image sizes until the best
      match is found. This may need a minute or more for a weak PC
      working with large images. You can speed up the process greatly if you
      reduce the input images to 1/2 size. Do this also if the process fails
      for lack of memory. Panoramas with 4 large images can require 2+ GB of
      memory during processing. <br>


      &nbsp; <img style="width: 323px; height: 267px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/panorama2.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>


      When fine alignment is complete, the combined image is displayed. The
      dialog shown here is started, for fine adjustment of brightness and
      color match. You may see a sharp border between images if the images do
      not have the same brightness and color balance. The [auto
        color] button can be used to
      perform an automatic color match, which is often satisfactory by
      itself. Use this button multiple times to get improved matching at the
      expense of greater color shifts that could add a false color tint.
      Restore the original image colors with [file
        color]. The image selected with the Select Image radio
buttons
      is the starting image for the auto color matching. Reset using
      [file color] and select a different starting image to see results that
      may be slightly different. The brightness and RGB color controls allow
      you to make additional changes to better match the images. Select one
      of the images with the radio buttons, change the values for brightness
      and color, and press the [apply]
      button to see the results. Use [auto color] to match the other images
      to the one changed. Use [file color] to restore the original values
      from the input images. The blend width
      input governs how the images are blended together: at the image joints,
      the color balance is gradually shifted over this many pixels, to mask
      imbalances that cannot be fully corrected. The default is 1 pixel,
      which makes any brightness or color differences look obvious. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


    When done, you can use unbend,
      warp, trim/rotate and other functions for final adjustments.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">


    </td>
    </tr>
  </tbody>
</table>
&nbsp; <br><span style="font-weight: bold;">

        Vertical Panorama </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This function works the same as
      horizontal panorama, except that the images are arranged vertically. To
      change the order of the images, drag them from near their centers. To
      rotate an image, drag the right edge up or down. It works best to align
      from the top down. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;

    <br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Panorama Notes</span><br>
<small><small><small><small>&nbsp;&nbsp; </small></small></small></small><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">Scanned images</span> can be combined
      if there is enough overlap. Check "no curve" since there is no
      curvature.<br>&nbsp;

      <br><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

      Auto Warping</span><br>

      The images are slightly warped in various directions during alignment
      to
      find the best match. This is to compensate for shifts in camera
      position or rotation, causing image distortions that reduce the quality
      of fit. If the overlap area of two images includes a large object that
      moved in or out between the two photos, the alignment process may go
      crazy trying to match the images, resulting in alignment that is very
      poor. By selecting no auto warp you
      may be able to get the alignment to succeed or have only a small error.
      <br>&nbsp;

      <br><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

      Mouse Warp</span><br>

      If the images do not align perfectly, you may be able to improve the
      alignment by using the mouse to push the images into alignment. In the
      final dialog, select <span style="text-decoration: underline;">mouse warp</span>,
      select which one of the images with the radio buttons, and then drag
      the mouse carefully along the edge of the image where it should align
      with its neighbor, and move the image into alignment. The image is
      moved locally around the mouse while more distant parts stay fixed.
      Parallax shifting will require a compromise, since it is generally not
      possible to keep both foreground and background in alignment. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;

    <br><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

      Setting lens mm
        Automatically</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    The [search] button
      in the panorama
      pre-alignment dialog initiates an automated search for optimum lens mm.
      Use a suitable image pair: the subject is 50+ meters away,
      the images have a low horizon difference and little relative rotation,
      and there is plenty of high-contrast detail in the overlap area. Input
      your nominal lens focal length for <span style="text-decoration: underline;">lens_mm</span>. After doing a decent
      pre-align, press the [search] button and wait a
      while for the results. Do this a second time and observe the change.
      If lens mm remains consistent, you can use it for your panoramas.
      The search function steps through a range of values for lens_mm and the
      image alignment offsets for x, y, and theta. It
      searches for the lens value that give the best alignment results for
      the given images. The process needs a minute or more, but you only need
      to do this once to characterize a given camera lens and focal length
      (zoom setting). Use the [save] button in the 1st dialog to put the
      focal length back into the image EXIF data. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif; text-decoration: underline;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Setting
        lens mm Manually</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Make a panorama image of a brick
      wall (or any wall with lots of detail). The wall should be 5+ meters
      away. Take two photos with about 40% overlap. Within the panorama
      pre-align process, adjust <span style="text-decoration: underline;">lens_mm</span> until overlapping
      bricks coincide. When making the two images, be sure to turn the camera
      on a vertical axis through the lens, minimizing lateral movement and
      rotation in other axes - otherwise your
      lens mm may not be optimal. The result should roughly
      correspond to the nominal focal length of your lens (35mm equivalent).
      It may be off somewhat (my 27mm lens works best with a lens_mm setting
      of 29-30mm). I speculate that this is because wide-angle camera lenses
      are not ideal lenses (pinhole equivalent). Most panoramas will still
      work well even if the lens_mm setting is off by 10%. <br>&nbsp;

      <br style="text-decoration: underline;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

      Color Matching Problems</span><br>

      If the images in a panorama have a large brightness difference in the
      overlap areas, the automatic color matching may not work well enough.
      The most common problem is false sky colors. You may be able to improve
      this by brightening or darkening an input image to more closely match
      its neighbors in the overlap areas. Sky can be easy to fix by selecting
      the false areas and copying sky from elsewhere in the image (see <a href="#paint_clone">Paint
        / Clone</a>). It seems to work better if you
      brighten the darker image instead of darkening the brighter one. You
      can do this in the final dialog as described above, or you can do this
      before starting the panorama. <br>&nbsp;

      <br><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

        Panorama Limitations </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Panoramas including nearby
      objects can be tricky: when the photos are made, be careful to turn the
      camera on an axis through the lens, with minimum lateral movement,
      otherwise the images may align poorly because foreground objects are
      shifted against the background (parallax). This is not an issue when
      the subject is 50+ meters away, since a small lateral movement has
      little impact on the image. Keep the camera level to avoid a large
      vertical shift (horizon shift), which can cause image distortions that
      may not be fully corrected. Avoid rotating the camera for the same
      reason. <br>&nbsp;

      <br><span style="font-weight: bold;">

      PT Panorama</span><br style="font-weight: bold;">

      The Panorama Tools utilities (via the Hugin package) have been
      integrated into Fotoxx under the menu PT Panorama. The user
      interface is very simple: specify the input images in any order and
      proceed. Everything else is automatic. After a minute or so the
      finished panorama is shown and is now the current file in Fotoxx. The
      file name is &lt;first input file name&gt;-PT.tif. This is an 8-bit TIF file
      and is very large. You can save the file as JPEG and delete the
      original TIF to save space. Panorama Tools usually does a fine job, but
      I have noticed minor alignment errors in some cases, usually too small
      to notice. It may be possible to eliminate these by using the full
      features of Hugin directly instead of the automated script used in
      Fotoxx. They may also be fixed using Mashup - see the related paragraph
      in Mashup, below.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 856px; height: 2990px;" border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">

      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="mashup"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
            Mashup</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
            <img style="width: 423px; height: 303px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/mashup.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5">Arrange
              multiple images and text in a layout (photo montage). Images can be
              added, resized, rotated and moved around by dragging with the mouse.
              Images can be made entirely or partly transparent in selected areas.
              Text can be added, moved, resized and rotated. Text attributes can be
              specified: font, size, color, outline, shadow, transparency.&nbsp;
              Lines and arrows can be added. The example here shows some of the
              possibilities.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
            <br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
            <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
            <img style="width: 229px; height: 172px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/mashup1.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>

              In the first Mashup dialog, choose a background or layout image where
              other images will be placed. Choose an existing image or create a new
              monotone image with a specified size and color. You may also open a
              previously saved mashup project and continue editing. <br>

            <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
            <br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
            <img style="width: 248px; height: 196px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/mashup2.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The 2nd Mashup dialog is a choice: edit images, edit text, edit lines
and arrows, rescale to a larger size, save the completed composite
image (Done) or abandon the image (Cancel). The first three choices
lead to dialogs to perform the respective edits. Each of these return
to this dialog when done, so you can add or modify images, text, and
lines / arrows in any sequence.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
            <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
            Rescale is explained
            below.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
            <img style="width: 269px; height: 464px;" alt="" src="images/mashup3.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5">Use this
              dialog to select
              and place images on the layout and revise their appearance: size,
              rotation, position, and transparency. An image may be partly or wholly
              transparent, overall or within specified areas. This means that the
              background image or an overlapped image can show through the
              transparent areas. The Add
              button leads to a gallery file selection dialog (<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#gallery_selection">link</a>).
              Selected images are placed on the layout. After the images are added, click on any image to select
              it for modifications.&nbsp; Drag the image from the middle to reposition the image in the
              layout. Drag the lower right corner to resize the image. Use
              the dialog controls to adjust the
              image. The dialog
              controls operate on the last image added, clicked or dragged. The Next button will cycle
              through the images one at a time, flashing the selected image. This can
              be used when overlapped images make it difficult to select the desired
              image by clicking it. Scale
              resizes the image. Angle
              rotates the image. The Stacking
                Order buttons raise or
              lower an image relative to other images - this determines which
              of two overlapping image will be on top. Base
                Transparency is used to make an entire image partly transparent.
              The [paint] button is used to
              make any part of an image partly or fully transparent, using the Paint
              dialog below. The [warp]
              button is used to bend or warp an image, using the Warp dialog below.
              The black margins
              checkbox can be used to remove black
              margins left by other edit functions, e.g. bend or warp. These will be
              made transparent. The Margins
              controls can be used to
              increase edge margins. The Hard margins cut off&nbsp; image edges. The
              Blend margins make the edges partly
              transparent to blend them into the background or overlapped images. <br style="font-weight: bold;">

               <br clear="all">
            <img style="width: 242px; height: 149px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/mashup4.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>

              "Paint" more or less transparency for selected image areas. Click on an
              image to select it. The mouse will have a circle around it to show the
              range of action. Use radius to
              adjust the size of the circle. Left-drag the mouse over the image to
              make it transparent in the areas covered by the circle. Right-drag to
              make it opaque. If Gradual is
              checked, transparency changes are made slowly as the mouse is dragged.
              Specify a power value for the
              mouse center and edges to make the changes faster or slower. <br>
&nbsp;
              <br>

              <img style="width: 217px; height: 164px;" alt="" src="images/mashup3b.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>

              Click this dialog to insure it is active, and click on an image to
              select it. Drag the image with the mouse - the image will warp or
              stretch locally in the direction of the mouse (like sheet rubber). The
              area of warping is roughly given by warp
                span, which is a fraction of the image size. Each drag is a step
              that&nbsp; adds to previous steps. Recent steps can be reversed with
              [undo last], and the unbent image can be restored with [undo all]. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">

             <img style="width: 397px; height: 324px;" alt="" src="images/mashup5.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>

              The Edit Text dialog is used
              for placing text on the layout. Enter some text and press Add.
              You are asked to click on the
              layout where the text will be added. Drag it into position, then use
              the dialog controls to set
              font, size, color, angle, background color, outline size and color,
              shadow size and color, and transparencies for each of these. Drag the
              text to a new position at any time. Click on any existing text to show
              its properties in the dialog and revise them. Click on a text and press Delete
              to remove it. When
              done editing, press Done to
              return to the 2nd Mashup dialog. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
            <img style="width: 387px; height: 270px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/mashup6.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
            The Edit Line /
                Arrow dialog is used for
              placing lines or arrows on the layout. It works very much like adding
              text. Enter a length and width and press Add. You
              are asked to click on the layout
              where the line will be added. A line is
              placed on the
              layout, or an arrow if one of the Arrow head options is checked. Drag
              the line / arrow to the desired position. Adjust length, width, angle
              and attributes (background, outline, shadow) using the dialog. You can
              also drag either end of the line/arrow to reposition that end while
              leaving the other end fixed. <br>

            <br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
            <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
            You can use the mouse
              to move and resize objects in
              the layout:<br>

              &nbsp; +&nbsp; click the object to select it - it flashes to confirm
              the selection.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
             &nbsp; +&nbsp; drag
              from
              the approximate center to reposition the object.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
             &nbsp; +&nbsp; drag the
              image or text lower right corner to resize.<br>

              &nbsp; +&nbsp; for a line/arrow, drag either end to move that end
              only.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
            <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
             The keyboard
                arrow keys can also be used
              to move the currently selected object in 1-pixel steps.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
            <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
            You can also add images saved
              by <a href="#select_area">Select Area</a>. In the
              Edit Images dialog, press [Add] to start the file selection dialog. Use
              the [Top] button in the gallery window, select HOME, then select
              .fotoxx/saved_areas. Open
              any of the .tiff images found there. The original area outline is used,
              and edge blending works from these edges. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
            <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">
            Mashup
              project files</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
            You can save a project and
              open it later to continue editing. However, the project file will open
              successfully only if the layout image and all the overlay images are
              still available in their original locations. The Mashup project is
              rebuilt using these images and some saved metadata that is in the
              project file: image and text locations, scales, transparency, etc.<br>

              &nbsp;<br><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

              Mashup Rescale</span><br>

              Working with a very large layout (over 20 megapixels) can be quite
              slow, especially if the PC is not very strong. Dragging a large
              overlay image can be slow and jerky. You can work much faster if you
              use a smaller layout to build the project, and then make it larger
              after you are finished. There is no loss of resolution in the final
              image, since the overlay images and text are regenerated from the
              inputs (e.g. an image that was scaled to 0.2x in the initial layout
              is rescaled to 0.6x if the layout is magnified by 3x). The original
              full
              size image file is used for this rescale. The Rescale
              button allows you to magnify
              the project by 2x, 3x or 4x (4x, 9x or 16x by area). There is also a <span style="text-decoration: underline;">reset</span> option to restore the original smaller project size. With this
              method, you can work with a 10 megapixel layout and resize it up to 160
              megapixels when done. The larger layout can still be worked on directly
              afterwards, but it will be much slower. <br>

              <br><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

              PT Panorama Fix</span><br>

Mashup can be used to fix minor alignment offsets from PT Panorama.
After running PT Panorama, start Mashup (in the same Fotoxx session),
and create a flat layout image with a good size for editing (e.g. 3000
pixels wide). Start the dialog to add images to the layout. Navigate to
the directory /tmp/fotoxx-xxx/ where you will find the images left by
PT Panorama. They have been color matched and warped to fit together.
Add these images to the layout. Check the box to make the black margins
transparent. Resize them to fill the layout (all must have the same scale) and move them around to fit
together. Zoom the window larger for precise algnment and align the
images as well as possible. Small misalignments will persist if the
images do not fit perfectly. There may also be brightness or color
mismatches at the image edges, but these can be fixed later. Start the
Warp Images dialog. Drag the mouse in small steps over a misaligned
area to move an image into alignment with its neighbor. Use a small
span (e.g. 0.1) to insure that correcting one misalignment does not
create others elsewhere. Several cycles of dragging the images in
several locations may be needed, but with patience you can make the
alignments perfect. If there are visible brightness or color mismatches
at image edges, blend these together using the margin blend controls.
This should be done only after the alignment has been perfected -
otherwise this will cause blurring where the images do not align,
making alignment corrections harder to see and control. Lastly, rescale
the layout to a larger size if wanted. This does not lose resolution,
since the input images are rescaled and the warps are rescaled and
re-applied. <br>

             </td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>

    &nbsp;&nbsp; <br>

    &nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp; <br>
<a name="undo_redo"></a><br><span style="font-weight: bold;">
Undo/Redo</span> <br>
If an edit function is active and the image has been changed: <br>
&nbsp; + left mouse click will undo the current edit<br>
&nbsp; + right mouse click will redo the edit<br>
This allows you to rapidly compare the "before" and "after" images for the current edit function.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
If no edit function is active, but one or more edit functions were done to the current image:<br>
&nbsp; + left mouse click will undo one edit step per click<br>
&nbsp; + right mouse click will redo one edit step per click<br>
&nbsp; + if combined with the <span style="font-weight: bold;">A-key</span>, undo/redo ALL edits (compare original and final images)<br>
This allows you to review "before" and "after" images in sequence for each edit done to the image.  <br>
&nbsp; + middle mouse click pops-up a list of all edit steps - select any step to go back to.<br>
&nbsp; + use the escape key to abandon the list without making any selection <br>
&nbsp; <br>
&nbsp; <br>
&nbsp; <br>
     <a name="tools_menu"></a>&nbsp;
    <br>
<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src="../icons/tools.png" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><big><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Tools Menu</span></big><br>

&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="index_files"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Index Image
      Files</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <img style="width: 360px; height: 338px;" alt="" src="images/index.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
    The Index
      Image Files function runs whenever Fotoxx is
      started.
      This function will create missing thumbnails, replace
      outdated ones, and refresh the metadata index using current data
      from your image files. This may need significant time if you have many
      thousands of new images. A strong PC
      can
      process about 1700 image files per minute, but some PCs will be
      much
      slower
      ("strong PC" means a 3 GHz multi-core CPU and a 7200 rpm disk). If
      there
      are no new image files, indexing should complete quickly (my strong PC, with 9000+ image files, needs
      &lt;1 second). <br>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Image files modified or moved within Fotoxx are taken care of automatically.
      The Index function is only needed when new image files are created from
      outside Fotoxx (e.g. a new batch of photos is added into the directories used by Fotoxx), or if files are
      moved or renamed from outside Fotoxx. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Index Image Files starts
      automatically at Fotoxx startup. It can also be started manually from
      the Tools menu. Unless there are hundreds of new images to process,
      this will be done in a few seconds. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Enter your <span style="text-decoration: underline;">top image
        directories</span> (e.g. /home/&lt;user&gt;/Pictures).
Enter
      the directory paths directly in the window, or use the [browse]
      button to locate and add directories. These directories and any
      subdirectories containing images will be processed. It does not matter
      if other files are mixed with the images. The simplest way is to use /home/&lt;user&gt;
      as the only
      top directory, but it is better to separate the image files from the
      hundreds of thousands of other files that may be under /home/&lt;user&gt;.
    Delete an entry by clicking the corresponding <span style="font-weight: bold;">X</span>.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Enter the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">thumbnails
      directory</span> where thumbnail
      files will be stored. Use the supplied default or set your own
      location. The directory name must end with .../thumbnails, and this
      will be added to your selection if needed. The directory is created if not already present. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
If you have used directory or file names to classify your images, you
can make immediate use of these in the Search Images function. If you
have saved dates, captions, tags, geotags, titles, or ratings in your
image metadata (using Photoshop or other apps), these will also be
searchable. After the images have been indexed, searching them by any
of the aforementioned criteria is almost instantaneous. Any other items
in the image metadata can also be searched, but at a slower speed. See <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#search_images">Search Images</a> for details. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="user_options"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    User Options</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
     Various user preferences and
      settings are collected in this dialog. <br>

      They are also saved in the file
      /home/&lt;user&gt;/.fotoxx/parameters. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <img style="width: 418px; height: 363px;" alt="" src="images/user-options.jpg" vspace="5"><br>
<small><small><small>&nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
</small></small></small>
    <table style="text-align: left; width: 849px; height: 485px; font-family: sans-serif;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>&nbsp;Startup
              Display&nbsp; </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Determines the initial
              window content when Fotoxx is started. <br>


              Recent Files: the most recently viewed or edited image files (gallery
              display).<br>


              Newest Files: image files most recently added to the Fotoxx database
              (gallery).<br>


              Previous Gallery: the directory of the last image viewed (gallery).<br>


              Previous Image: show the last image viewed.<br>


              Blank Window: start with no current image and the top image directory
              in the gallery.<br>


              Directory Gallery: the given image directory.<br>


              Image File: the given image file. </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Browse<br>


      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Opens a dialog to browse for the starting directory or image file (last 2 options above).<br>


      </small></td>
    </tr>
<tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>&nbsp;Menu
              Style </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>The menu style: icons
              only or both text and icons.<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Dialog font<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>The font name and size to use in all menus and dialogs (Bold, Italic, etc. are ignored). <br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
<tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>&nbsp;Image
              Pan/Scroll<br>


              &nbsp;(zoomed image) </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Drag: image moves with
              the dragged mouse.<br>


              Scroll: image moves against the dragged mouse (like invisible scroll
              bars).<br>


              Magnified: movement is magnified: multiple drags for large movement are
              not needed. </small></td>
        </tr>
        
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>&nbsp;Zooms
              for 2x<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Choose 1, 2, or 3 zooms
              for each 2x increase in image size. </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;JPEG quality</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>The default quality value
              when saving an image as a jpeg file type.</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Thumbnail size<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>The pixel size for
              gallery thumbnail width/height: 128 | 256 | 512 (default 256). 512 is a bit
              slower but better for a large monitor or one with a high DPI
              resolution, or when viewing large galleries.
              If this is changed, you need to delete your thumbnail files so that the
              file index process will rebuild them with the new size (next Fotoxx startup).<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Curve edit node<br>
&nbsp; capture distance<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>The minimum node
separation for edit curves. Also the mouse capture threshold when a
node is clicked or dragged. The default is 5% of scale, allowing up to
20 nodes in a curve. If you use a touchpad instead of a mouse, set this
value higher to compensate for lower positioning accuracy. Flexibility
for extreme curve bending will be less. <br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
<tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>&nbsp;hidden
              directories&nbsp; <br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Show hidden directories
              in gallery view. If not checked, these are not displayed.<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>&nbsp;prev/next
              version <br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Show only the last
              versions of image files when using the prev/next button or KB keys.<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;RAW command </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>The command used to
              convert camera RAW files to tiff-16. This can be changed if you need.<br>


              See the man page for dcraw for more details.<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;RAW file types </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>The RAW file types
              recognized. If your camera uses something else, add it to the list and
              this may work. <br>


You can also shorten the list to those file types you
              actually use. </small></td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    </table>
    &nbsp;&nbsp; <br>
<table style="text-align: left; width: 828px; height: 327px;" border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">

      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="KB_shortcuts"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
            Keyboard
              Shortcuts</span> (key K)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
            <img style="width: 368px; height: 267px;" alt="" src="images/KB-shortcuts.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
This function is used to
              view or
              change custom keyboard shortcuts. The currently assigned shortcuts are
              shown in the window. Enter a new shortcut using the keyboard. You can
              use the keys A-Z, 0-9, F2-F9, and most of the symbols (# $ &amp; ^ &lt;
              etc.). You can combine a key with Ctrl, Alt or Shift: Press and hold
              Ctrl, Alt or Shift, then press the key, then release both. Select one
              of the available menu assignments from the drop-down list. To remove a
              shortcut, select it and press [Delete]. If you press [cancel] or [x]
              all changes will be discarded. The [Reserved] button shows a list of
              reserved shortcuts that cannot be used here.  <br>

            </td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>

    &nbsp;
        <br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="show_brdist"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Show Brightness
        Distribution </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This function opens a small
      window that shows a brightness distribution graph of the current image
      in the main window, or the currently selected area of the image. This
      graph updates immediately for new images or as edit functions change
      the image. There are four graphs in four colors: red, green, blue
      graphs are for the respective colors. The black graph is for overall
      brightness. Use the buttons [Red] [Green]
      [Blue] and [White] to select the colors to show. White means all colors
      added together. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="grid_lines"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Grid Lines</span> (key
      Alt+G)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <img style="width: 355px; height: 191px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/grid-lines.jpg" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">

    This function adds or removes
      horizontal and vertical lines across the image. The lines are useful
      when an image must be rotated for horizon alignment, or when an image
      is unbent or warped to straighten walls or other objects in the image.
      The settings for x- and y-spacing control the spacing (pixels) between
      the lines. If the controls for x- and y-count are NOT zero, then the x-
      and y-spacing values are ignored and the number of lines will be set to
      these counts. Example: set x- and y-count to 2 lines each in order to
      divide the image into thirds horizontally and vertically. The x- and
      y-enable checkboxes can be used to enable and disable the vertical and
      horizontal lines separately. The keyboard shortcut Alt+G can be used to
      toggle the grid lines on and off (this shortcut can be <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#KB_shortcuts">changed</a>). If an image is
      printed with grid
      lines enabled, the grid lines are also printed. The x- and y-offset
      controls can be used to shift the grid lines to intersect a desired
      point in the image. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Several edit functions have a
      button [grid] which starts this same dialog. The resulting grid line
      settings are specific to that function only, and will be restored
      whenever that function is in use.<br>

      &nbsp;&nbsp; <br>

      <a name="line_color"></a><br><span style="font-weight: bold;">

      Line Color</span> - Change Color of
      Foreground Lines<br>

      Some functions draw lines over the image (Trim/Rotate, Area
      Outlines, others). You can change the color of these lines to maximize
      contrast against the background image. The small dialog can be left
      open while editing, to conviently switch among the available colors
      (black, white, red, green). <br style="font-weight: bold;" clear="all">

      &nbsp; <br>

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="show_RGB"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Show
        RGB</span><br>

    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 806px; height: 293px;" border="0" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="0">

      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><img style="width: 247px; height: 279px;" alt="" src="images/show-RGB.jpg"><br>
          </td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;">When a point on the image is clicked, the RGB
              values are shown in a dialog window. The last 9 clicked points are displayed. The values have the format xxx.dd,
              where xxx is the upper 8 bits of the
              color value and .dd is
              the lower 8 bits. The range is 0.00 to 255.99. The lower 8 bits are
              zero unless the image is being edited or the image is a 16-bit TIFF or
              PNG file. EV (exposure value) is an alternative unit, useful for
              precise color adjustment. EV is zero for mid-brightness (128). The
              outputs are updated immediately if the image is being edited. The last
              nine points clicked are shown. The points are labeled on the image
              corresponding to the letters A-I in the dialog window. If "delta" is
              checked and the image is being edited, then the changes are shown
              instead of the absolute values. If no edit is active, "delta" does
              nothing.</td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>

    
    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 557px; height: 32px; font-family: sans-serif;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">

      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp; RGB </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>0 </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>1 </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>2 </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>4 </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>8 </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>16 </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>32 </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>64 </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>128 </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>256 </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp; EV </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>nan </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>-7 </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>-6 </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>-5 </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>-4 </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>-3 </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>-2 </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>-1 </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>0 </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>1 </small></td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>

    &nbsp; <br>

    <a name="magnify"></a><br><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Magnify Image</span>&nbsp; (key M) <br>

    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 809px; height: 457px;" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">

      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><img style="width: 546px; height: 349px;" alt="" src="images/magnify.jpg" vspace="5"><br>
            This function magnifies the image in an area around the mouse pointer. Left-drag
            the mouse around the image
            to magnify different areas,
            analogous to viewing a printed image through a magnifying glass. Use
            the dialog to adjust the radius of the area and the amount of
            magnification. A mouse click will end the magnify, and a new mouse drag
            will start it again. Use the M-key
            shortcut to start or end the Magnify function. <br>
          </td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>

    &nbsp;&nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="darkbrite_pixels"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif; font-weight: bold;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Dark / Bright
      Pixels</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This function is used to
      highlight the darkest and brightest pixels in an image. Adjust
      the two sliders to set the brightness thresholds, which are initially 0
      for dark pixels and 255 for bright pixels. Pixels with a brightness
      less than the dark threshold or greater than the bright threshold are
      highlighted on the image. The image responds quickly to changes in the
      sliders. You can use this function in parallel with edit functions to
      control edit results. <br>
&nbsp; &nbsp;
      <br>

    
    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 844px; height: 284px;" border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">

      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="monitor_color"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
            Monitor
              Color</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
            <img style="width: 417px; height: 262px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/colorchart.png" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>

              Eight color bands are written across
              the screen with brightness from zero (black) to 100%. You can use this
              to adjust the brightness of your monitor. The left end of each stripe
              should be as black as possible, but you should start to see some color
              within a few mm from the left edge. If the completely black portion is
              wider than this, adjust the monitor. There are 255 brightness steps
              from black to 100% (8 bits per color). The steps are too small to
              distinguish with the eye. This evaluation should be done in a darkened
              room (with little external light falling on the monitor). </td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>

    &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 832px; height: 405px;" border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">

      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="monitor_gamma"></a> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
            Monitor
              Gamma</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
            <img style="width: 146px; height: 345px;" alt="" src="images/gammachart-reduced.png" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>

              Gamma determines how RGB brightness
              values (0-255) are converted into brightness on the monitor. The
              standard value is 2.2 and this should normally be used for image
              editing. Adjust the dialog slider until the middle band has the same
              brightness as the upper and lower bands at scale location 2.2. Be far
              enough from the monitor that you cannot see the fine lines in the
              chart. The
              chart only works at 100% size, so do
                not zoom the chart. The command line utility "xgamma" is
              required (normally present). <br>

              <br>

            The chart image
              originates
              from <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="http://www.normankoren.com/makingfineprints1A.html#gammachart" target="_blank">Norman Koren</a>.
              The linked web site has more information about this chart. <br>
      <br>
The chart here in the User Guide has been reduced. Do not use. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
          </td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>

    &nbsp;&nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="change_language"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Change
        Language </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This function allows you to
      change the GUI to one of the available languages. If your language is
      not available or has missing translations, consider making a
      translation. See menu
    Help &gt; Translations.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="missing_translations"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Missing
      Translations</span><br style="font-weight: bold; font-family: sans-serif;">

    This function lists all missing
      translations to a popup window. Translations left as English are not
      reported, since this is often deliberate, e.g. words like "font" or
      "icon". <br>
<br>
<a name="calibrate_printer"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Printer Color Calibration</span><br>This utility may be able to improve the color accuracy of printed images.<br>
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">How It Works</span><br>
A chart of known colors is printed on the target printer. The print
will have some false colors caused by the printer. This print is
scanned into a file, and the colors in this file are compared to the
original colors that were sent to the printer. Any differences are
errors that are now known. When an image file is printed, these errors
are subtracted from the image colors before printing. The printer adds
the errors back, leaving a result that is theoretically correct
Practice may be otherwise. My own result was a modest improvement,
detailed below. <br>
<br><span style="text-decoration: underline;">Hopeful Assumptions</span><br>
<ul>
  <li>Your scanner produces accurate colors. Scanners are generally more accurate than printers. <br>
</li>
  

  
  <li>The printer color errors are small enough that negating them
before printing will cancel <br>
most of the error. This is less likely if the errors are large. <br>
  </li>

  <li>The limited set of colors in the chart (4913) can be used to calculate all in-between colors. <br>
Each image color adjustment is interpolated from the nearby colors in the chart. <br>
 </li>
  
</ul>
Perform the following steps in sequence, as listed by the dialog
window. Each step has instructions to perform the step. All files
normally reside in the directory <span style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">/home/&lt;user&gt;/.fotoxx/printer_color/.</span><br>

<ol>
<li>Generate and print the color chart file <span style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">(printchart.png</span>) on the printer to be calibrated.<br>
Use a large paper size (A4 or US Letter) and vertical paper orientation. <br>
</li><li>Scan the printed chart into a PNG file. Use 300 dpi or more to make a large file. <br>
</li><li>Edit the PNG image to trim off margins left by the scanner. Save the edited image<br>
as &lt;filename&gt;.png. Use a name indicating the printer settings and type of paper.<br>
</li><li>Process the edited chart file to create a color map file &lt;filename&gt;.dat.<br>
Use a name indicating the printer settings and type of paper used.<br>
</li><li>Print a color-adjusted image. You are asked for the color map file to use.<br>
</li>
</ol>

Once you have made the color map file, you can print any image using step 5 only.<br>
There is also a File menu function to do step 5 only: <a href="#print_image">Print Calibrated</a>.<br>

<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Precautions For Best Results</span><br>
<ul>

  
  
  <li>Use a large paper size for printing the chart (A4 or US Letter) to make the color tiles as big as possible.</li>

  <li>Clean the scanner glass before scanning the color chart. Dust spots or smudges will falsify the colors. <br>
</li>
  <li>Scan with a high DPI setting (300+) to make a large chart file. This will make the next step more accurate.<br>
  </li>
  
  <li>Edit
the scanned chart image file. Be sure "TOP" is at the top. Trim off the
margins surrounding the color tiles. Use the fat green line
surrounding the color tiles as a guide: cut off this line exactly,
leaving only the tiles. Work with 2x magnification while adjusting the
trim rectangle. Accurate
trimming is critical. The tile positions
are calculated from the final image dimensions, assuming 58 equal
columns and
85 equal rows. If some edge tiles are cut short, or if margins are
left, then the calculated tile positions will be offset, and the
measured colors will be wrong. A small error of 1-2 pixels is
tolerated, because the outer 20% of each tile is not used to read the
tile color. You can use the keyboard arrow keys to make 1-pixel
movements in the trim rectangle. The last corner pulled with the mouse
is the corner that the arrow keys will move.<br>
  </li>


  
  <li>Scanners may skew the scanned image into a non-rectangular form. If
this happens, you will notice it when trying to trim off the margins: the fat green lines will not align
perfectly with the trim rectangle, even after slightly rotating the image for best fit. If this happens,
use <a href="userguide-en.html#fix_perspective"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">fix perspective</span></a> to square the image first, then trim the margins.</li>
  <li>If you notice any black or white spots in the scanned chart image (from dust), fix them with <a href="#paint_clone">Paint/Clone</a>. <br>
  </li>

<li>The output color map file can be used only for the paper, ink,
and printer settings used for the calibration. Any other combination
needs its own calibration and color map file. Use the name of the color
map file to include more information, e.g. cmyk-glossypaper.dat. <br>
</li>
</ul>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Results (my Canon printer)</span><br>
<small><small><small><small><small>&nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp;  </small></small></small></small></small><br>
<table style="text-align: left; width: 858px; height: 391px;" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="2">
  <tbody>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><img style="width: 500px; height: 379px;" alt="" src="images/printer-calibrate.jpg" align="left" hspace="5">A
standard color chart was scanned and printed on photo paper. The left
print
had no adjustments. The right print was adjusted. This image has all
three charts in one photo. The printer did
a fairly good job by itself, but the adjusted print is slightly better.
Some colors are more accurate. Others are little changed. <br>
&nbsp; <br><small><small></small></small><img style="width: 266px; height: 138px;" alt="" src="images/printer-cal-study.png" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br></td></tr></tbody></table>&nbsp;<br>
You may be able to find a real <a href="https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ICC_profile">ICC color profile</a>
for your printer and its proprietary inks and photo paper. Using this
would most likely produce better results. Check the installation CD supplied with
your printer, and also the manufacturer's web site. There are also
professional services to generate an ICC color profile. The procedure
is similar to the one described above: you print a color chart supplied
by the service, send the printed paper back to them (along with some
money), and receive an ICC profile, a file which you can install.
Perform a web search for "icc profile service".<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="resources"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Resources
    </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This is a diagnostic tool to
      monitor resources, especially memory leaks. <br>

      The following data is output to the log file (or terminal window):<br>

      &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; process time: CPU time used, since the last time
      shown here<br>

      &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; zdialog counts: total dialogs in memory and those
      still active (visible)<br>

      &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; zmalloc counts: memory allocations and releases
      since the last time shown here<br>

      &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MB: total allocated memory at this time in megabytes<br>
&nbsp; <br>
&nbsp; <br>
&nbsp; <br> <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="help_menu"></a><br>

<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src="../icons/help.png" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<big><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Help Menu</span></big> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">
    Quick Guide </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This is a 1-page introductory
      document with Fotoxx essentials. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">
    User
        Guide&nbsp; (key F1) </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    The user guide (this document)
      is displayed (created using the WYSIWYG HTML editor Kompozer). <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">
    User
        Guide Changes </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This is a summary of recent
      changes in the User Guide. The intent is to enable you to survey the
      changes without reading the whole document.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">
    Edit
      Functions Summary</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    A one-page "quick reference"
      summary of the image edit functions is displayed. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">
    README
    </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Displays the README file
      distributed with Fotoxx, which may contain new information about
      installation or dependencies. When you install a new release of Fotoxx,
      you should look at README and the Change Log to check if there is
      anything special you need to be aware of. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">
    Change
        Log </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Displays the change log file
      distributed with Fotoxx, containing details about functional changes,
      additions, or bug fixes for the current and previous releases. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">
    Translations </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Displays a short text file which
      explains how to make a new translation or change an existing one. <br>

<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">
    Home Page </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Shows the Fotoxx home page from
      the Internet. Look here for program updates (the page named "recent
      changes"). This page is published via RSS and you can subscribe to get
      timely notification of changes. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">
    About
    </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    This displays a short message
      about the Fotoxx version number, license, credits, and contact address.
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;
    <br>
&nbsp; <br>
&nbsp;&nbsp; <br>
<a name="sync_gallery"></a><br>


<img style="width: 36px; height: 36px;" alt="" src="../icons/sync.png" vspace="5"><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">

      Sync Gallery&nbsp;</span> <br>


Replace the current gallery (recent files, search results ...) with the
directory of the current image file: the image shown in the File View
window. Click on any thumbnail in the gallery to set the current image
from that thumbnail, then select the Sync Gallery menu (button) to set
the directory and generate a new gallery from that directory. <br>

&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>

&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; <br><a name="albums_menu"></a>&nbsp;
    <br>


<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src="../icons/albums.png" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<big><span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Albums
        Menu </span></big><br>


      &nbsp; &nbsp;<br>


    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="manage_albums"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Manage
        Albums </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


    An album is an arbitrary
      sequence of images that is manually assembled from existing images.
      This is one method to make groups of associated images. An image
      album is simply a list of the member image files. The image files
      themselves are not copied or changed. A given image file can be a member of
      multiple albums, or may be present more than once within an
      album. Albums can be used to group images with some shared attributes,
      such as photos from a vacation trip, photos of a given
      person taken at different times or events, a "best photos" collection,
      etc. You can add and remove images in an album and rearrange the
      order of the images. Once an album is made, you can call it up by
      name and it becomes a gallery. This gallery works like any other: you
      can scroll through the gallery, step through the images with the
      [Prev/Next] button, or edit the images. Keep in mind that editing an
      image in an album will edit the unique image file, so any other way
      to view this image will show the same image. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Image Cache</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


    This is an intermediate storage
      area used to hold selected images for later insertion into an
      album. In general, you select image files from gallery windows and
      add them to the cache, then you make a new album with images from
      the cache, or you add the cached images to an existing album at a
      chosen position within the album. <br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


    
    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 830px; height: 478px;" border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">


      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">
              Manage
              Albums Dialog</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
            <img style="width: 271px; height: 269px;" alt="" src="images/albums1.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">New</span>:
              Start a new album or replace an existing one. The dialog shown
              immediately below is started. <br><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

              Choose</span>: Choose an
              album to view or edit. The gallery window will show its current
              images. Use the thumbnail popup menu (below) to add or remove images.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">
            Images:</span>
              Add images to the image
              cache using the standard dialog for selecting images from gallery
              windows (<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="userguide-en.html#gallery_selection">link</a>). Select image files in any order
              from any gallery. You can also use <a href="userguide-en.html#search_images">Search
                Images</a> to create a
              gallery for selecting images, or choose an album gallery. Selected
              images are added to the image cache. The cached images can now be added
              to an album using the popup menu (below).<br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">
            Clear</span>:
              Discard all images in the
              image cache. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">
            Delete</span>:
              Select an album to
              delete. Image files are not deleted. <br clear="all">
            &nbsp; <br><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

                New Album dialog</span><br>

              <img style="width: 316px; height: 175px;" alt="" src="images/albums2.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5">Specify
              an album name, or use the [browse] button to select an existing
              album to be replaced. Select one of the three options. Option 1
              creates the album with no images. Option 2 fills the album
              from cached images, if any. Option 3 creates the album from the
              current gallery. This may be a directory, the output of an image
              search, or an album. <span style="text-decoration: underline;"></span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
            </td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>

<span style="text-decoration: underline;">
            Right-click
                Popup Menu</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


            <img style="width: 556px; height: 357px;" alt="" src="images/albums3.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>

<small><small><small>&nbsp; <br>
</small></small></small>
<table style="text-align: left; width: 753px; height: 257px;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">

  <tbody>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Copy to Image Cache<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Add the clicked image to the image cache.</small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Cut to Image Cache<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Remove the image from the album and add it
              to the image cache.</small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Copy to Clipboard<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Copy the image to the clipboard (for other apps to paste).<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>Paste Image Cache Here (keep)&nbsp;  <br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Insert all cached images at the clicked position.
              Click roughly between two thumbnails where the images will be inserted.</small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>Paste Image Cache Here (clear)&nbsp; <br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Same as above, but the cache is cleared.<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Paste Current Image File Here<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Inserts the current image file at the clicked position.</small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Remove from Album<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Remove the clicked image from the album</small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Popup Image<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Pop-up a large resizeable window for the image. Replace previous popup window.<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Popup Image (add)<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Same as above, but keep previous popup window and create a new one.<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>View Metadata<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Metadata short report for clicked image file. <br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
  </tbody>
</table>

&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Drag and Drop</span><br>


    You can rearrange images
      within an album by dragging thumbnails with the mouse. Drag the
      thumbnail until the mouse cursor changes to a small image of the
      thumbnail. Continue dragging this image to the position where it should
      be inserted, and release the mouse button. Position the mouse roughly
      between the images where the dragged image is to be inserted. If the
      drag approaches the top or bottom edge of the window, the gallery will
      scroll to bring more images into view. <br>


    <br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">

      Summary</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


    
<ul style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<li>Make a new album: Use the [New] button and provide a name.<br>
      </li><li>Add images to an existing album: Use the [Choose] button and
        select an album. Use the [Images] button to select images from any
        gallery. After closing this dialog, the gallery reverts to the chosen
        album. Right-click an album thumbnail and select one of the
        Paste menus to insert the selected images. You can also choose another
        album and insert the images if you did not clear the cache. <br>
      </li><li>Remove images from an album: Right-click each thumbnail, then
        select the Remove menu.</li><li>Move images within an album: Use the Cut or Copy menu and the
        Paste menu to move multiple images. To move one image at a time within
        a single album, you can use mouse drag and drop.</li>
</ul>
&nbsp;&nbsp; <br>


    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="slide_show"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Slide Show</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


    With this function you can show
      a pre-selected sequence of images in full-screen mode.<br>


      There are three dialogs used to define and customize a slide show.<br>


    <img style="width: 681px; height: 850px;" alt="" src="images/slide-show.jpg" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


    Use
      the <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="userguide-en.html#manage_albums">Manage
      Albums</a> function to assemble
      the images for
      a slide show as an album with an assigned name. This allows you to
      collect images from anywhere in your image database and order them as
      desired. In the slide show dialog, press [Select] and
      choose an album
      from the list provided. Press the Proceed button to start the slide show with
      the first image (or the current image, if a member of the slide show
      album). Use the escape key
      or F11 to exit the slide show
      and return to the dialog. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


    <br>


      The spacebar can be
      used to pause and resume between slides. The B-key can
      be used to blank the
      screen and pause the show. Press again to restore the current image, or
      press the spacebar to resume with the next image. You can use the left
      and right arrow keys to go
      back and forth within the sequence of images. You can interrupt the
      slide show by pressing the  ESC
        key for a gallery view. Click on a thumbnail
      image, and
      this will be the next image to show. This allows you to skip around
      more easily than stopping and starting the show each time. The M-key
      can be used (whenever the
      slide show is paused) to start the magnify function to view selected
      parts of the image at higher size. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


    <br>

Dialog Controls:<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    
        Seconds</span>: The standard time each image is shown. <br>

This can be
      modified per image with the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Images Preferences</span> dialog.<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">

      Clip Limit</span>: Images are scaled
      to fit the window. If the image and window aspect ratios are different,
      this will create black margins above and below or left and right of the
      image. You can optionally make the images expand to fill these margins
      and cut off the opposite sides of the image (e.g. if the margins are on
      the left and right, the image is expanded to fill these margins and cut
      off the top and bottom equally). You control how much of this is
      allowed with the Clip Limit, which is the percent difference in aspect
      ratios above which expansion and clipping will not be done. Zero means
      no
      clipping is done, 10% means that images with 10% or less difference in
      aspect ratio will be expanded and clipped.<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Music
        File</span>: An optional music file or playlist that will start when
      the slide show is started.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">

    Full
        Screen</span>: If checked, images
      are shown full-screen without menu, title bar, etc. <br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">

      Auto-replay</span>: if checked, the
      slide show will start over after reaching the end.<br>


    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


    Press
      [transitions] to start a dialog
      to select and customize the transitions between images. These include
      instant replacement, fade-out / fade-in, and many animated methods of
      image replacement (e.g. the new image expands from the center to
      replace the old image). Select the transitions to be used and whether
      they are used randomly or in sequence. The slowdown
      parameters can be used to
      slow transitions that may operate too fast on some PCs (some may
      be too slow on slow PCs, but this cannot be helped). The preference
      parameters specify a
      relative preference which will influence how frequently the transition
      type is used when random sequence is selected. The random method avoids
      using a transition that was used shortly before, and will only work if
      5 or more transitions are selected.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


    Press [image
      files] to start a dialog for image
      preferences. These are optional. An image is selected for customizing
      by clicking its thumbnail (press the [gallery] button or G-key to show
      thumbnails). The dialog is filled-in with default settings or the
      previous settings for this image. Enter revisions and press [done], or
      click on the next image to be customized. If <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Play
      Tone</span> is selected, a tone is played when
      the image appears during the slide show. The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Show Caption /
        Show Comments</span> times
      determine how long the image caption and comments will be shown above
      the image. After this time they disappear. Captions and comments are
      edited with <a href="userguide-en.html#edit_metadata">Edit Metadata</a>.
      The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Wait times</span> determine how
      long the
      image will wait before and after the optional zoom, before moving on
      to the next image. These are always used, even if there is no zoom. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Zoom type</span> selects zoom-in (image approaches) or zoom-out (image recedes). <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Zoom
        size</span> controls how much the
      image will be zoomed and <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Steps</span>
      determines how many steps are made during the zoom. 1.0 means no zoom,
      and 3.0 is the maximum zoom (image is 3x larger). Use at least 300
      steps for a smooth zoom, and more than this if you want it to zoom
      more slowly. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Zoom location</span>
      determines the center of the zoom, expressed as a percent of the
      image width and height (50/50 is the center of the image). These are
      set by mouse-clicking the thumbnail image at the desired zoom
      center. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Transition</span> is used to select a transition type
      to be used from this image to the next image. If transition type "next" is selected, then the normal
      transition sequence is used, as specified in the Transitions dialog. <br>


      &nbsp;
      <br>


    Sequence of slide show events for
      each image:<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


    &nbsp; +&nbsp;
      play the tone if specified<br>


      &nbsp; +&nbsp; show
      the
      caption and comments for the specified times (may be zero)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


    &nbsp; +&nbsp; wait for the
      first interval (may be zero)<br>


    &nbsp; +&nbsp; perform
      the zoom (if the zoom size is &gt; 1)<br>


    &nbsp; +&nbsp; wait
      for
      the 2nd interval (may be zero)<br>


    &nbsp; +&nbsp; wait
      for
      the standard interval specified in the Slide Show dialog<br>


      &nbsp; +&nbsp; do the transition to the next image<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">


    &nbsp;
    <br>


    <a name="set_desktop"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">

        Set Desktop Wallpaper</span><br>


      The desktop wallpaper image is set from the current Fotoxx
      image file. No inputs are required. Note:
      this function works only for
      the Gnome window manager (including Ubuntu).
      Other window managers will not work. <br>


      &nbsp;
     <br>


    <a name="cycle_desktop"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">

    Cycle Desktop Wallpaper</span><br>


    
    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 851px; height: 388px;" border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">


      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;">The desktop wallpaper image is changed at regular intervals, using a Fotoxx album
            as the list of images to show. Fotoxx runs in the background without
            a window or GUI interface. It has no effect on normal interactive use of Fotoxx.<br>
      <br>
      <span style="text-decoration: underline;">How to cycle the desktop wallpaper</span>:
            <ul><li>Create an alternative name for the fotoxx executable (e.g.
                fotoxx-wallpaper):<br>
                &nbsp;&nbsp; $
                  sudo link
                  /usr/bin/fotoxx /usr/bin/fotoxx-wallpaper &nbsp; (needs to be done only once)<br>
              </li><li>Start&nbsp; fotoxx-wallpaper, passing the album name and the time
                interval in seconds:<br>
                &nbsp;&nbsp; $
                    nohup fotoxx-wallpaper -cycledesktop albumName seconds &gt;/dev/null &amp;<br>

                </li><li>To stop the background process:&nbsp; $
                  pkill
                  fotoxx-wallpaper</li></ul>
            Seconds must be at least 10 and there is no upper limit. The nohup
            command runs the command
            detached from the terminal, so that the terminal can be closed without
            killing the process. The character&nbsp; &amp;&nbsp;
is
            added after a command to make it run in the background without
            blocking the terminal or shell script from which it was started. <br>
            &nbsp; <br>
            To make a permanent process that persists after a reboot or new
            logon, put the
            following command into your startup list:&nbsp;&nbsp; fotoxx-wallpaper
-cycledesktop
albumName
                3600 &amp; <br>
This example changes the desktop wallpaper image every hour. To change
the wallpaper only for each new login, use a time value &gt;1 day: 86400.<br>

            &nbsp;<br><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

                Note</span>:
              this function works only for Gnome and Ubuntu.<br>

            </td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>
&nbsp; <br>
&nbsp;&nbsp; <br>
<table style="text-align: left; width: 841px; height: 517px;" border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">




      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="bookmarks"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
            Bookmarks</span> <br>

              <img style="width: 434px; height: 456px;" alt="" src="images/bookmarks.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5">&nbsp; <br>

Assign names
              ("bookmarks") to
              chosen gallery locations (directory and image file), keep in a list,
              and use the list to select a name and go instantly to the
              associated gallery position. There are two
              parts: an edit dialog to build the list of bookmarks, and a [GoTo]
              button in the gallery view to show the bookmarks and select a location
              to go to. To assign new bookmarks, press the [GoTo] button and then
              select [Edit Bookmarks] in the dialog that follows. The Edit Bookmarks
              dialog is started. Click on a gallery thumbnail to add this location to
              the bookmark list. The assigned bookmark name will default to the file
              name. This name appears in an edit field where you can assign a
              better name. If you select an existing bookmark with a mouse click, its
              name is shown in the input field. You can change the name or press
              [delete] to remove the bookmark. New bookmarks are inserted at the last
              bookmark location selected. To go to a bookmark, press the [GoTo]
              button. The list of bookmarks is shown. Click on an entry to go there. </td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>

&nbsp; <br>


&nbsp;  <br>
&nbsp; <br>
<a name="sort_gallery"></a><br>

<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src="../icons/sort.png" vspace="5"><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">
Sort Gallery</span> <br>

Sort the gallery thumbnails in an alternative sequence. You can sort by
file name (default), Photo date/time (from EXIF data), or file
modification date/time (file creation or last modification date/time).
The sequence may be ascending or descending.<br>
&nbsp;
<br>
&nbsp; <br>

&nbsp; <br>
<a name="batch_menu"></a><br>

<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src="../icons/tools.png" vspace="5">  <br><big><span style="font-weight: bold;">Batch Menu</span></big><br>
&nbsp;&nbsp; <br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="batch_convert"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">



    Batch Convert
      Files</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">



    This function is used to rename,
      convert, resize, upright and move multiple image files at once. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">



    <img style="width: 408px; height: 274px;" alt="" src="images/batch-convert.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">



    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">



    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 717px; height: 195px; font-family: sans-serif;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">



      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Select Files<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Select files to convert
              from a gallery window (<a href="#gallery_selection">link</a>).<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>New Name<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Optional new name with #
              characters to be replaced with
              sequence numbers.<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Sequence Numbers<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Starting sequence number
              and adder for each output file.<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>New
              Location<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Optional new directory
              location for the converted files.<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>new
              file type<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>File type for converted
              images, or "no change".<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>max.
              width, height<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Output images will fit
              within these dimensions (ratio is not changed).<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>delete
              originals<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Delete the input files
              after successful conversion.<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>copy metadata<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Copy all EXIF and IPTC
              metadata to the output files.<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>upright<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>If an image is rotated
              90\B0/180\B0, upright it (status known from EXIF).<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>sharpen<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Sharpen output images
              using the two supplied parameters<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>



    <br>
If <span style="text-decoration: underline;">New Name</span> contains the string "[oldname]", this is replaced with the original file name.<br>
Either "[oldname]" or # characters must be present to insure output file names are unique.<br>
If <span style="text-decoration: underline;">New Location</span> is missing or unchanged, <span style="text-decoration: underline;">delete originals</span> is ignored.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">



    If an output file already
      exists, the input file is not converted.<br>

      For an explanation of the sharpen parameters, see the <a href="#sharpen_image">Sharpen</a>
      function. <br>

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">



    Albums</span><br style="font-weight: bold;">

      If image files are renamed or moved using Batch Convert, and if
      deletion of the original image files was also specified, then all
      albums containing any of the input files are updated to reflect
      the new names and locations.<br>

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">



    Upload Photos
      to a Website</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">



    Most photo websites have the
      ability to upload multiple image files from a single directory, using
      only a web browser. Use the above Fotoxx function to select, resize,
      and export image files to the desktop or any other directory. From
      there, use the photo website's native browser interface to upload the
      image files. <br>
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Preserving File Sequence</span><br>
If you use a leading sequence number, the input file sequence will be
preserved at the output location. Thus you can select image files in
any order, or use an album with ordered images, and preserve this
sequence in the output.<br>

      &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">



    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="batch_upright"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">



    Batch Upright<br>
<img style="width: 222px; height: 127px;" alt="" src="images/batch-upright.jpg" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
</span> This function works like Batch Convert Files but only does the
upright function. It uprights image files rotated 90 degrees. It
depends on EXIF data to know if a file is rotated. It is much faster
than Batch Convert Files. You can simply select all candidate files and
let it find the ones that are rotated. The search speed is about 3000
image files per minute on a strong PC. There are two options to specify
the files to search. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Select Files</span> leads to a gallery file selection dialog (<a href="#gallery_selection">link</a>). <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Survey all files</span> will check all image files in your database and upright those that are rotated. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">



&nbsp;&nbsp;
    <br>

<table style="text-align: left; width: 870px; height: 184px;" border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">

  <tbody>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a name="batch_delete_trash"></a><br><span style="font-weight: bold;">



      Batch Delete/Trash</span><br>

      <img style="width: 224px; height: 128px;" alt="" src="images/batch-delete-trash.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5">Select files from a gallery (<a href="#gallery_selection">link</a>). <br>
Select the option to delete or move to trash.<br>
[Proceed]<br>
      </td>
    </tr>
  </tbody>
</table>

&nbsp;  <br>



<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="batch_raw"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">



    Batch RAW
      (DCraw)</span><br style="font-weight: bold;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">

      Batch RAW (Raw Therapee)</span><br>

    <img style="width: 435px; height: 287px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/batch-convert-RAW.jpg" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">



    These functions convert selected
      RAW image files to JPEG, PNG-8, PNG-16, TIFF-8 or TIFF-16 format, using
      the program DCraw or Raw Therapee. The PNG and TIFF formats have either
      8 or 16 bits per color. RAW files generally have 10-12 bits per color,
      and noise beyond that. Therefore use a 16 bit format to keep all of the
      data available from a RAW file. The difference between 8 and 16 bit
      color is rarely visible, but a higher color depth provides a greater
      margin for retouch functions that can radically shift the brightness
      distribution, causing a problem known as "banding" or "posterization". <br>

      <br>

      Use the [Select Files] button to choose one or more RAW image files
      from a gallery window (<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#gallery_selection">link</a>).
      Choose one of the output formats. Choose one of the downsize options if
      wanted, and set the auto sharpen parameters if wanted. See the <a href="#sharpen_image">Sharpen </a>function
      for an
      explanation of these parameters. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">



    <br>

      The remaining parameter options (white balance etc.) apply only to
      DCraw - they are not shown if Raw Therapee is used, because parameter
      settings for batch operation are not available (defaults are used). The
      default settings for DCraw generally work well and you probably will
      not need to change them. The parameters for DCraw are documented in the man page ($ man dcraw). <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">



    <br>

      The image files are converted one at a time and displayed in the main
      window. Depending on the number of files, this can take a long time (a
      strong PC does about 40 files per minute for most RAW file types and
      TIFF-16 output). PNG-16 produces much smaller files than TIFF-16
      because the files are compressed (with no data loss). This also needs
      more time to do the compression work. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">


&nbsp;&nbsp;
     <br>




    <a name="script_files"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Script Files<br>
<img style="width: 205px; height: 156px;" alt="" src="images/script-files.jpg" vspace="5"><br>
</span>Script files allow you to define a set of edits once, and carry
them out on as many image files as you wish. This can be useful when
many photos of the same subject were made under the same lighting. You
can choose one photo and edit it to perfection, recording every
function used and adjustment made in the dialogs and curves. Then you
can apply these edits to the entire batch of photos. Certainly this
will not be as good as editing each photo individually, but it is much
faster, and you can always go back and make additional adjustments
after viewing the results. <br>
<br>
Press [start] to begin a new script file. You will be asked to assign a
file name for the script. The script dialog now exits. Now choose an
image file and perform your edits. After each edit function is done, a
message appears to confirm its addition to the script. All the dialog
inputs and curve edits are now saved in the script file. After the last
edit, open the script menu again and choose [close] to complete the
script.<br>
<br>
To execute a script, open the script menu and choose [run]. You will be
asked to select a script file to execute and a set of image files to
process with the script. When you complete the image file selections,
the script starts up and processes all the image files in sequence. You
can watch the action as the images fly past. All modified images are
saved as new versions, so the original files are not lost. Those you
decide you no longer need can be quickly removed using the <a href="#batch_delete_trash">Batch Delete/Trash</a> function. <br>
<br>
If RAW files are processed, the corresponding outputs are TIF-16 files.<br>
<br>
Not all edit functions are scriptable. Some edit functions use mouse
drags on the image, e.g. Trim/Rotate and all warping functions. These
are not scriptable. If you try to use one of these while building the
script, you are told this is not possible. <br>
<br>
The following functions are currently scriptable. Others are possible
but have not been converted for scripting. If there is a need for some
function not included, <a href="http://kornelix.com/contact">contact me</a>.<br>
<small><small><small><small>&nbsp; <br>
</small></small></small></small>
<table style="text-align: left; width: 591px; height: 296px;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
  <tbody>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Retouch Combo</small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Brightness/Contrast/Color adjustments</small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Adjust Brightness Dist.</small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Reshape the brightness distribution</small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Zonal Flatten</small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Enhance dark areas with low contrast</small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Tone Mapping</small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Enhance local contrast where weak</small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Resize</small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Specify width/height or ratio (e.g. 1/2)</small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Voodoo1</small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Automatic enhance</small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Voodoo2</small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Automatic enhance</small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Sharpen<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Sharpen fuzzy edges<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
<tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Blur</small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Blur image<br>
</small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Denoise<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Reduce image noise <br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
<tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Shift Colors</small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Tune colors</small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Adjust RGB/CMY</small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Tune colors</small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Brightness Ramp</small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Vary brightness across the image</small></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Color Mode</small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Change B&amp;W/color or positive/negative</small></td>
    </tr>
  </tbody>
</table>
&nbsp; <br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="burn_DVD"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

<span style="font-weight: bold;">



    Burn
        Images to CD / DVD </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">





    This function enables you to
      choose image files and burn them into a CD or DVD or BlueRay disc. When
      the function starts, an image gallery window is displayed from which
      you can select the image files to burn (<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="userguide-en.html#gallery_selection">link</a>).
When done, the list of image files is sent to Brasero to burn the disc.
Note that the CD/DVD/BlueRay disc must be unformatted, and Brasero
supports only one burn session on a disc. Leftover space on the disc
cannot be used later to add more images. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

&nbsp; <br>


    
    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 822px; height: 349px;" border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">




      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><a name="find_duplicates"></a><br><span style="font-weight: bold;">

              Find Duplicate Images</span><br>

                <img style="width: 283px; height: 223px;" alt="" src="images/find-dups.jpg" align="left" hspace="5" vspace="5">This
function is used to find duplicated image files anywhere within your
image database. A duplicate image file can be an image file that
exactly duplicates another image file, or an image file that "almost"
duplicates another. For the sake of speed, thumbnail images are
compared in memory. Hence it is possible that identical thumbnails are
found for which the main images have some minor (likely invisible)
differences that do not show up in the thumbnails. An image copy that
was reduced to 1/2 size is likely be classified as a duplicate. The
thumbnail size can be set from 32 to 256 pixels (max. width or height).
A larger size reduces the probability of false positives. The thumbnail
size greatly affects the amount of main memory required - e.g. for 100K
images, size 32 needs 220 MB, whereas size 64 needs 880 MB. The memory
required is roughly size x size x 0.75 x 3 x (image count). Two
parameters are used to set the sensitivity for detection of identical
or nearly identical images: pixel difference is the RGB value
difference below which pixels are considered equal. Set to 1 to detect
any pixel difference. pixel count is the number of different pixels
below which two images are classified as duplicates. Example: if pixel
difference = 3 and pixel count = 100, then images are classified as
duplicates if fewer than 100 pixels are different by less than 3. The
output is a gallery view, showing each set of duplicate images.
Screening 8K images needs about 16 seconds on a strong PC.</td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>



&nbsp;&nbsp; <br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp; <br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Batch and search functions in the </span><a style="font-weight: bold;" href="#metadata_menu">Metadata</a><span style="font-weight: bold;"> menu are duplicated here in the Batch menu.</span><br>
&nbsp;&nbsp; <br>&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    &nbsp;  <br>

<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="images_by_map"></a> <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">




      <img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src="../icons/viewW.png" vspace="5"><br><span style="font-weight: bold;">Images
        by Map Location</span>&nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">



    If the separate package fotoxx-maps
      is installed, a set of
      geographic maps is available for Fotoxx. These are a world map and maps
      of each continent. Click the menu bar World Maps button to change to
      map view mode. A world map is shown at first. Click on any area to get
      a much larger view of that area. The map image can then be panned and
      scrolled to any other area by dragging the mouse. Map locations having
      corresponding geotagged images are marked with red dots. Click on a map
      location to get a gallery of images from the marked location. The
      window changes to the gallery view and the gallery appears. Press the
      maps button and click a new location for a new gallery report. When in
      map mode, a Map Functions menu
      is available with two functions: Choose
        Map
      allows you to choose any available map. You can install maps of your
      own (e.g. country, city, park ...). Instructions are below. All maps
      will show red dots where there are corresponding geotagged images. Map
        Search Range
      allows you to set a search distance when a map location is clicked.
      Images within this radius will be included in the gallery report. The
      default is 10 km. <br>

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">



    Map
        Navigation</span>: zoom and pan / scroll for a map is slightly
      different from image files:<br>

      &nbsp; +&nbsp; mouse wheel forward: zoom the map to full size,
      centered
      on the mouse position<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">



     &nbsp; +&nbsp; mouse wheel
      backward: shrink the map to fit within the window<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">



     &nbsp; +&nbsp; left click on
      a
      red dot: show gallery of images geotagged for that marked location<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">



     &nbsp; +&nbsp; left click NOT
      on a red dot: zoom the map to full size, centered on the clicked
      position<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">



     &nbsp; +&nbsp; right click:
      shrink the map to fit within the window<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">



    &nbsp; +&nbsp; keyboard Z key:
      alternate between full size and shrink to fit<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">



     &nbsp; +&nbsp; mouse drag:
      the
      zoomed map image pans and scrolls like other images <br>

      <br><span style="text-decoration: underline;">

      Installing Custom Map Files</span><br style="font-weight: bold;">
Obtain the map from any suitable source, e.g. Google Maps or Open
Street Map. You need to get the map as a graphic image, a JPEG or PNG
file. (Open Street Map offers a download tool, but I have not been able
to make it work.) Screen
capture works. You can use the Fotoxx Mashup tool to stitch many maps
together to make a big map (e.g. 100 megapixels). These work well with
Fotoxx pan and zoom. You can also use a scanner to capture one or more
paper maps and accurately stitch them together with Mashup. <br>

      <br>

      To install a map, put the graphic image file into the directory /usr/share/fotoxx-maps/data.
      In this directory you will also find a text file: maps_index. Each
      map has a line in this file which contains the map file name and the
      latitude-longitude range of the map. Here is an example maps_index file:<br>

    
    
<table style="text-align: left; width: 428px; height: 23px; font-family: monospace;" border="0" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="0">



      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;">&nbsp;&nbsp;
            USA.jpg,&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp; 24.855,&nbsp; 49.17,&nbsp;
            -124.99,&nbsp; -59.766<br>
            &nbsp;&nbsp; Europe.jpg,&nbsp;&nbsp; 30.89,&nbsp;&nbsp; 71.25,&nbsp;
            -10.73,&nbsp;&nbsp; 39.71</td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    
</table>



    The entries are map file name, low and high latitude, low and high
    longitude. All values are separated by commas. Spacing does not matter.
    Fotoxx assumes a Mercator
      projection, but this is not significant for maps covering less than 100 km. <br>

      <br>

      If you make a custom map, getting accurate latitude and
      longitude values for the map edges can be tricky. Use the Open Street
      Map "export" option to view maps with an overlay rectangle labeled with
      latitude and longitude. Adjust the rectangle to match a corner of a map
      you have created and record the values. You
      need accurate latitude and longitude data for the upper left and
      lower right corners of the completed map. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
 
    &nbsp; <br>
&nbsp; <br>
&nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="organizing_images"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><big><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Organizing
      Images for Efficient Searching</span></big><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    The goal is to find all images
      for a given set of criteria, e.g. photos of a given person at a given
      place and time range, or all photos of a given person, or
      photos from a specified location or event, etc. There are several ways to
      organize an image collection to accomplish this, with advantages and
      disadvantages you need to understand. These methods may be used in any
      combination (I use all of them). Keep in mind that if you want to user
      other programs for searching images, you need to pay attention to which
      methods are compatible. Fotoxx is standards-compliant to avoid lock-in,
      but some other applications use proprietary methods (e.g. for storing metadata).<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Fotoxx can search using the
      following image attributes: photo date, rating (0-5 stars), tags
      (keywords), geotags (location names and earth coordinates), file
      directories and names, and text appearing in captions or comments.
      These are explained in the <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#edit_metadata">Edit
      Metadata</a>, <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#edit_geotags">Edit Geotags</a>, and <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#search_images">Search Images</a> topics. In
      addition, any metadata
      can be searched, although not nearly as fast as the previously listed
      items, which are duplicated in a special index file for fast
      searching. The <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#index_files">Index Image
      Files</a> function establishes this index and
      updates it when new image files are added or their file locations are
      changed from outside Fotoxx. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    The following is an attempt to
      give an overview of the options and tradeoffs. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">
    Physical
      Organization</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Directory and file names can be used as a basic organization that will
enable you to find images even if more elaborate organizations (tags,
albums, captions) are not used. The highest physical organization
should be by time. This will also naturally group photos together that
were made for an event, travel location, etc. I suggest using one
subdirectory per year named 2001, 2002, etc. This will also prevent any
one subdirectory from getting too big. Optionally, image files may be
further organized in time sequence by using MM.DD as the start of the
file name. The rest of the name can be a topic or event, and a sequence
number. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Example:
      /images/2011/08.20 Spitzbergen 23<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    This very basic organization
      allows Fotoxx to find files by searching file names. In the above
      example, a search for "spitzbergen" or even "spitz" will produce all
      the images of Spitzbergen. The function Tools &gt; Batch Convert lets
      you rename a whole batch of photos taken on one day at one location or
      event by selecting the files (<a href="#gallery_selection">link</a>) and then specifying a template name like "08.20
      Spitzbergen ##". The sequence numbers are automatic, replacing ##. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">
    Captions and
      Comments</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    A simple method of organization
      is to use captions and comments (Metadata &gt; Edit Metadata). These
      are arbitrary text strings that can be added to a series of images in
      rapid sequence: <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; open the
      first image, input some text, press [apply], press [next], input some
      text, ...<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Captions and comments are two
      separate inputs but treated logically the same. They are searchable:
      words appearing in captions and comments can be searched for. You can
      specify persons, location, topic, etc. for each image and then find
      them again quickly. With this method, you can search images using any
      words appearing in captions or comments, in combination with dates and
      file names. Dates are taken from the automatic EXIF data from the
      camera. For images without this, dates can be edited using the Edit
      Metadata
      function. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">
    Tags</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The most powerful tool is tags, but this is also the most demanding of
organizational care. You can go through your images sequentially and
add tags by clicking on a list of defined tags. New tags can be defined
as needed. Images can have many tags, and can be searched using AND /
OR combinations of tags (along with date, rating, file name, caption,
comments, location, others). Tagging is generally fast, needing a few
seconds per image. Fotoxx has two methods of adding tags, a "managed"
system and a "random" system. In the managed system, you define tag
category names and the tags within each category. When adding tags to images, you can point and
click from a list of tags organized by category and alphabetically
within category. This list should be small enough (&lt;500?) to be practical for
visually locating tags to click on. In the random system, you simply
create tags as needed while you tag your images, following no
particular system and without categories. After you have entered the
first few characers of a tag, existing tags that match these characters
are shown in a list and you can click one to complete adding the tag.
If there is no match, a new tag is created. In either case, recently
used tags are shown in a list that can be clicked. Photos made at the
same time will normally be tagged in sequence, and will also share many
of the same tags. The recent tags list helps to speed-up the tagging
process. There is also a batch function for adding the same tags to
many images that you select by clicking thumbnails (<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#gallery_selection">link</a>). Note that images downloaded from
      the Internet may have many tags adhering to no system. You will
      need to clean these out or redo them (if not, these tags are added to your list of defined tags).<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">
    Geotags</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Use geotags to assign a city (or national park, etc.) and country, and
optionally latitude / longitude to your images. This enables all images
for a location to be quickly found (or those near a location if
latitude / longitude is used). If you use a camera with a GPS receiver
and automatic geotagging, then geotags are in the image EXIF data and
location searching is available automatically. Since image dates are
also automatic (in EXIF), images can be searched by date range and
location without you having to enter any data for each image. You can
leave it at this, or add some of the above extras if you accept the
extra effort required. My experience so far with automatic city /
country via GPS is that the names are chaotic and you may want to
sanitize them (upper/lower case, with/without states or other political
subdivisions, fix mixed languages, etc.). You can fix the mess with a
little effort: search for the location you want to change (e.g.
MÜNCHEN), then process the resulting images with the <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#batch_add_geotags">Batch Add
      Geotags</a> function to change
      the location (e.g. Munich). <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">
    Albums</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Another method of organization
      is to use albums. Choose a name for each album and
      assign any desired images to the album, using one click per image
      thumbnail (<a href="#gallery_selection">link</a>).
The images are not duplicated: the album is simply an ordered list of
directory/file names. This method is independent of tags, captions,
file names, etc. See <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#manage_albums">Manage Albums</a>. Albums can be selected by name
      and viewed directly as a gallery of thumbnails, sequentially in file view, or as a <a href="#slide_show">Slide Show.</a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;

    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">
    Summary</span><br style="font-weight: bold; font-family: sans-serif;">
    The following table summarizes
      the options. Keep in mind that searching by date works with any of
      these methods, and you can combine the methods any way you wish, e.g.
      "directory and file names" together with "captions and comments". <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <table style="text-align: left; width: 864px; height: 446px; font-family: sans-serif;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;">Method
              and Example<br>

            </td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;">&nbsp;Advantages<br>

            </td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;">&nbsp;Disadvantages<br>

            </td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small><span style="text-decoration: underline;">Directory
and
                File Names</span><br>


              e.g. image files like this:<br>


              &nbsp; /images/2012/Rome-12.jpg</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+ simple and easy to use<br>

            + fast implementation: batch move and <br>


              &nbsp; &nbsp; rename files with added sequence numbers<br>

            + gallery overview at each level of hierarchy<br>

            + easy to navigate up / down hierarchy levels<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+ no overview of
              available search terms<br>


            + long file names required for multiple search <br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; categories (date, place, persons, events ...)<br>

            + risk of inconsistent names, unreliable search<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><span style="text-decoration: underline;">Captions and
                Comments</span><br>


              e.g. caption or comment like this:<br>


              &nbsp;&nbsp; 2012 Italy Rome Forum </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+ simple and easy to use<br>

            + flexible search using multiple categories<br>

            + moderately fast implementation: <br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; think + write time, per image<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+ no overview of
              available search terms<br>

            + may end up with thousands of categories<br>

            + risk of inconsistent names, unreliable search<br>
</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><span style="text-decoration: underline;">Managed Tags</span></small><br>
      <small>+ e.g. rome, Italy, Susan<br>
      </small><small><small><span style="text-decoration: underline;"></span></small>
+ Point and click in a tag list<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; to add tags to images<br>
      </small><small>+ Tags have categories for faster <br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; visual location in the tag list <br>
      </small><small>+ Recommend &lt;500 tags</small><br>
</td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+ good overview of available tags to click <br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; (organized by persons, places, events ...)<br>

            + easy creation of new tags<br>
+ no inconsistent or redundant tags, no typos<br>
+ therefore searching more reliable<br>
</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+ requires careful
              planning of tags<br>


            + slow to find and click tags if &gt;500 tags <br>


            + hard to revise tag naming system<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; (batch tag add / delete / rename available)<br>
<br>

          </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><span style="text-decoration: underline;">Random Tags</span><br>
+ tags with no organizing system<br>
+ large tag count &gt;500<br>
      <br>

      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+ no planning needed<br>
+ creating and entering tags is faster <br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; (point and click or type-in tags)<br>
+ legacy tags can be kept unchanged<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+ inconsistent tags (scenery, landscape)<br>
+ redundant tags (Susan, Susi, Susy)<br>
+ tags with typos (scenery, scenrey)<br>
+ poor overview of existing tags<br>
+ therefore searching less reliable<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
<tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small><span style="text-decoration: underline;">Geotags
                </span><br>


              e.g. location data like this:<br>


              &nbsp;&nbsp; Rome Italy 41.89 N 12.48 E</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+ cameras with GPS
              store
              data automatically<br>

            + add locations in a few seconds per image<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; (or batch add location to many images)<br>

            + search location by clicking on a map image<br>

            + search location and date-range by clicking <br>


              &nbsp; &nbsp; on a report of available locations / dates<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+ useful only for
              searching by location<br>


            + chaotic location naming by cameras <br>


              &nbsp; &nbsp; (revise using search and batch update)</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><span style="text-decoration: underline;">Albums</span><br>


              e.g. album names like this:<br>


              &nbsp; + best scenery<br>


              &nbsp; + Italy 2012<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+ make ad hoc albums
              using any criteria<br>

            + images can be in multiple albums <br>


              &nbsp; &nbsp; or multiple times within one album<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+ time to locate and
              add
              images to an album<br>


              &nbsp; &nbsp; (find and click gallery thumbnails)<br>


            + images not searchable by other categories<br>

            + not usable by other applications<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    </table>
    &nbsp;
    <br>
    &nbsp; <br>
&nbsp; <br>
<a name="translations"></a><br>
<big style="font-weight: bold;">Translations</big><br>
&nbsp; <br>
Translation files for Fotoxx are found at&nbsp; <span style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">/usr/share/fotoxx/locales/translate-xx.po.gz</span><br style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">
This is the installed translation file for language code "xx". It may
or may not be compressed (.gz ending). "xx" is a standard 2-character
language code (e.g. "de" for German) or a combination language and
region code formatted "xx_XX" (e.g. "de_AT" for Austrian German). This
code normally corresponds to the locale of the computer, as shown by
the command "echo $LANG". If there is no installed translation file for
"xx", you can use the dummy translation file for "en" (English) as a
template. Replace the translations of "english to english" with
"english to new-language", and save the new file with the right "xx"
code. The translation files <span style="font-family: Liberation Mono;"></span>are
protected and cannot be edited unless you have root privileges. It is
better to copy a translation file to a more convenient location for
editing, and save the edited file in the standard location when ready
to test. <br>
<br>
Translation files are commonly called ".po files" and have the file type ".po". <br>
A typical translation in a .po file looks like this:<br>
<span style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">&nbsp; msgid "The file name is: %s \n"</span><br style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">
<span style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">&nbsp; msgstr "Der Dateiname ist: %s \n"</span><br style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">
<br>
"msgid" is an English text for translation. "msgstr" is the translation
(German in this case). The special codes "%s" and "\n" are for inserted
text and formatting. A file name will be inserted at "%s", and "\n"
indicates the end of a line when the message is displayed. In the
translation, these codes must match the English codes in both type and
sequence.<br>
<br>
A missing translation looks like this:<br>
<span style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">&nbsp; msgid "The file name is: %s \n"</span><br style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">
<span style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">&nbsp; msgstr ""</span><br style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Revising an existing translation</span><br>
<ol>
  <li>Edit&nbsp; <span style="text-decoration: underline;">translate-xx.po</span>&nbsp; to add or update translations for language "xx".</li>
  <li>Replace the original file in <span style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">/usr/share/fotoxx/locales/.</span></li>
  <li>Option: compile the .po file to check for errors:&nbsp; <br>
    <span style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">&nbsp;$ msgfmt -v --check-format -o /dev/null translate-xx.po</span></li>
  <li>Run Fotoxx and check how the translations look. If the computer
locale is not "xx", start fotoxx in language "xx" with the
command:&nbsp; <span style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">$ fotoxx -l xx</span></li>
  <li>Send the modified .po file to&nbsp; <span style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">kornelix@posteo.de</span>&nbsp; so it can be included in Fotoxx releases.</li>
</ol>
Step 3 is optional. The usual binary translation files (.mo) that are output by <span style="text-decoration: underline;">msgfmt</span>
are not needed by Fotoxx. The translation source files (.po) are read
directly by fotoxx, and changes made to a .po file are effective the
next time Fotoxx is started. Step 3 is useful to find errors (e.g.
missing or non-matching format codes, quote marks, etc.). <br>
<br>
Whenever fotoxx is started from a terminal, missing translations are listed in the terminal window.<br>
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Problems with long translations</span><br>
English can be terse compared to other languages (e.g. "undo" is
"Rückgängig machen" in German), and this can cause a confusing appearance in the GUI
layouts. Therefore try to make dialog labels and buttons short, and
look closely at the resulting GUI layout. <br>
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;"></span><span style="text-decoration: underline;">User Guide translation</span><br style="text-decoration: underline;">
The English user guide is normally found here:<br>
<span style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">&nbsp; /usr/share/fotoxx/data/userguide-en.html</span><br style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">
The file is a text HTML file, which may be edited with any HTML editor.
This is a large document, so expect a week or more of work to translate
it. In order to reduce the work, you can use a simple text editor and
supply text without images - in this case I will convert to HTML and
supply the images. If you make a new or revised translation, please
send it to&nbsp; <span style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">[kornelix@posteo.de</span>]&nbsp; so it can be included in future releases. <br>
&nbsp; <br>
&nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    &nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="recent_changes"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><big><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Recent
        Changes </span></big><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    This section is provided to help
      you quickly review the changes without reading the whole manual. <br>

      Fotoxx version numbers correspond to year and month of release. <br>
<br>
v.15.11 (this release)<br>
<ul>
  
  <li><a href="#pattern">Pattern</a>: topic was revised for extended functionality (contrast parameter).</li>
  <li><a href="#adjust_HSL">Adjust_HSL</a>: topic was revised for extended functionality (target color selection).</li>
  <li><a href="#batch_convert">Batch Convert</a>: topic was revised for extended functionality (preserving input file names).</li>
  <li><a href="#sphere">Spherical Projection</a>: new function to make a spherical projection of an image.<br>
  </li>



</ul>

v.15.10<br>
<ul>
  <li><a href="#calibrate_printer">Calibrate Printer</a>: topic was revised for improved procedure.</li>
  <li><a href="#print_image">Print Image</a>: topic has an additional paragraph for calibrated printing.</li>
  <li><a href="#batch_metadata">Batch Add/Change Metadata</a>: topic was revised for user interface improvement. <br>
</li>
  <li><a href="#script_files">Script Files</a>: new function for batch editing of image files.</li>
  <li><a href="#user_options">User Options</a>: new option to make using touch pads easier for curve editing.&nbsp;</li>
  <li><a href="#custom_kernel">Custom Kernel</a>: user interface improvement. <br>
  </li>




</ul>
v.15.09<br>
<ul>
  
  <li><a href="#area_copy_paste">Area Copy and Paste:</a> this function
was restored after being removed in 15.08. Save Area File and Open Area
File can be used to do the same thing, but this method is faster and
easier in the common case where an area is copied and pasted and does not need to be saved in a file for later usage. <br>
</li>
  <li><a href="#user_options">User Options:</a> the font and size used in menus and dialogs can be set by the user.</li>
  <li><a href="#calibrate_printer">Calibrate Printer:</a>&nbsp; new tool to improve the color accuracy of printed images. <br>
  </li>


</ul>

v.15.08<br>
<ul>
  <li><a href="#britedist">Adjust Brightness Distribution</a>: Functionality was extended and the UI changed. <br>
</li>
  <li><a href="#batch_metadata">Batch Add/Change Metadata</a>: new function to revise any metadata for multiple image files.</li>
  <li><a href="#edit_metadata">Edit Metadata</a> and <a href="#search_images">Search Images</a>: tag pick-list shows all tags or only a selected category.</li>
  <li><span style="text-decoration: underline;"><a href="#area_open_save">Open and Save Area File</a>:</span> save and open cutout areas as PNG files with transparency data.<br>
  </li>
  <li><a href="#add_text">AddText</a> has new functionality to rapidly add the same text to multiple image files.</li>
  <li><a href="#paint_transp">Paint Transparency</a>: new function to paint transparent areas onto an image.<br>
  </li>




</ul>


      v.15.07<br>

    
    <ul>
      <li>The Fotoxx UI had significant revisions and this user guide was revised accordingly. <br>
</li>
      <li>Effects &gt; <a href="#pencil_sketch">Pencil Sketch</a>: you can
        now choose the foreground and background colors.</li>
  <li><a href="#batch_delete_trash">Batch Delete/Trash</a>: new function for batch trashing or deletion of image files.<br>
  </li>
  <li><a href="#select_area">Select Area</a> dialog - buttons added to change line color more easily.</li>
  <li><a href="#gallery_view">Gallery Navigation</a> was simplified with clickable button per directory level.</li>
  <li><a href="#user_options">User Options</a> interface has minor improvements. <br>
</li>
  <li><a href="#undo_redo">Undo/Redo</a> button: middle click pops-up a list of edit steps you can go back to.</li>
  
  <li><a href="#batch_upright">Batch Upright</a>: new option to check the entire image database to fix rotated images.</li>
  <li><a href="#edit_metadata">Edit Metadata</a> and <a href="#search_images">Search Images</a>: revised to better support thousands of unorganized tags.</li>
  <li><a href="#batch_rename_tags">Batch Rename Tags</a>: new function to rename any number of tags and apply to all images.<br>
  </li>







    </ul>
    v.15.06<br>

    
    <ul>
      <li><a href="#adjust_HSL">Adjust HSL</a> color adjustment tool was
        added.<br>
      </li>
      <li><a href="#cycle_desktop">Cycle Desktop Image</a> was simplified
        and
        improved.</li>
      <li><a href="#set_desktop">Set Desktop Image</a> function was added.</li>
      <li><a href="#denoise_image">Denoise Image</a> has a new method:
        Threshold. <br>
      </li>
      <li><a href="#mashup">Mashup</a> interface for adding text and lines
        was improved.</li>
      <li><a href="#trim_rotate">Trim/Rotate</a> now includes an [Auto]
        button to automatically trim black margins. <br>
        The Auto-Trim menu function has been removed.</li>
      <li><a href="#KB_shortcuts">Keyboard Shortcuts</a> has a button to
        show all standard (reserved) shortcuts.<br>
      </li>
    </ul>
    v.15.05<br>

    
    <ul>
      <li><a href="#denoise_image">Denoise Image</a>: New function to
        measure and reduce noise with minimal loss of details.</li>
      <li><a href="#newest_images">Newest Images</a>: Select EXIF date
        or file modification date to determine the newest image files.</li>
      <li><a href="#cycle_desktop">Cycle Desktop Image</a>: New function to
        cycle
        the Desktop background image using a Fotoxx album.<br>
      </li>
    </ul>
    v.15.04<br>

    
    <ul>
      <li><a href="#zonal_flatten">Zonal Flatten</a>: New Edit function to
        enhance detail in image areas with poor contrast. <br>
      </li>
      <li><a href="#directed_blur">Directed Blur</a>: New Effects function
        to
        blur an area in a single direction.<br>
      </li>
      <li><a href="#plugins">Plugins</a>: Support added for commands that
        do not
        edit an image file. <br>
      </li>
      <li><a href="#voodoo">Voodoo Enhance</a>: a second method was added
        based on Zonal Flatten.</li>
      <li><a href="#user_options">User Options</a>: an option was added
        to show or hide hidden directories in gallery view.<br>
      </li>
    </ul>
    v.15.03
      <br>

    
    <ul>
      <li>Rotate 90 was renamed to <a href="#upright">Upright</a> and the
        funtionality was extended.</li>
      <li>"Named Collections" are now called "<a href="#manage_albums">Albums</a>".
        Menus, dialogs and the user guide were revised.<br>
        The directory .../.fotoxx/collections&nbsp; is renamed
        to&nbsp;
        .../albums (nothing is lost).</li>
      <li><a href="#mashup">Mashup</a> has extensive changes for
        controlling overlay image transparency and warping.<br>
      </li>
    </ul>
    v.15.02
      <br>

    
    <ul>
      <li>The startup parameter -nosync
        was changed to
        the more correct -noindex.&nbsp; <br>
        See the technical notes section below for command line
        parameters.&nbsp; <br>
      </li>
      <li>A multi-row <a href="#panorama">panorama</a> capability was
        added using the Panorama Tools utilities.</li>
      <li><a href="#user_options">User Options</a> has a new parameter:
        Thumbnail size.</li>
      <li><a href="#slide_show">Slide Show</a> has added flexibility for
        showing image captions and comments.<br>
      </li>
    </ul>
    
      v.15.01<br>

    
    <ul>
      <li>The <a href="#plugins">Plugins</a> menu was moved from the left
        panel into the Edit menu, to conserve space.</li>
      <li>Adding and revising <a href="#plugins">plugin</a><a href="#plugins"> functions</a> was
        made easier.</li>
      <li><a href="#denoise">Denoise</a>: explanation was added
        for the new dark areas
        functionality.</li>
      <li><a href="#gallery_view">Gallery</a> popup image: new
        functionality with F11 and Escape keys.</li>
      <li><a href="#magnify">Magnify</a> function: the user interface was
        made more flexible.<br>
      </li>
    </ul>
    &nbsp;&nbsp; <br>&nbsp; <br>
&nbsp;  <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="technical_notes"></a>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><big><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Technical
        Notes </span></big><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Fotoxx
      Limitations</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <table style="text-align: left; width: 804px; height: 272px; font-family: sans-serif;" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0">
      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>image
              files<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Fotoxx
has been tested with 156K image files and performace was good on a
strong PC. 500K image files should be practical on a strong PC, but
startup time may be 20+ seconds.<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>image size </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>The max. supported
              image width or height is 20,000 pixels (compile time constant). <br>
The maximum image size is 2 GB (about 170 megapixels). <br>
Images in memory are 3 floating point numbers per pixel representing 3 RGB colors.<br>
 </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>image edits </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>99 edits for undo /
              redo and file version numbering (filename.v01 to filename.v99). </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>image tags<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>10,000 tags, 200,000 chars. for all tags, 1000 chars. for one image file.<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
<tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>geotag
              cities&nbsp;&nbsp; </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>20,000 different
              cities / locations for geotagged images (compile time constant).<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr><tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>gallery size<br>
practical limit<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Approx. 10,000 files in a
directory or generated gallery (e.g. from an image search operation).
The limit is the memory required for an internal thumbnail cache that
enables gallery scrolling to work fast. A PC with more main memory can
handle more. If the largest thumbnail size is used (512 pixels), the
practical limit is reduced. <br>
Memory = (thumbnail size) x (thumbnail size) x 3 x 0.8 x (thumbnail count). <br>
10,000 thumbnails of size 256 pixels requires about 1.6 GB of main memory. <br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>

        
      </tbody>
    </table>
    &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Running out
      of memory</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Fotoxx can require a huge amount
      of main memory to edit a large image. A 20 megapixel image requires 720
      megabytes for the simplest edits, and more for complex edits. Images in
      memory are not compressed and each RGB pixel is represented by three
      floating-point numbers (12 bytes total). HDR, Panorama and other
      composite functions hold all images in memory during alignment and
      post-process tuning. If you push the memory limits on a small PC,
      the Linux OS may kill the Fotoxx process without warning and with no
      message (this is to keep the operating system itself from failing).
      What you see is that the Fotoxx window simply vanishes. Fotoxx monitors
      the amount of memory available in the top panel above the
      image window, and gives a&nbsp; warning if memory is running low, but this is sometimes too late to avoid being killed. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Running out
      of disk space</span> - temporary files during an edit session<br style="font-weight: bold; font-family: sans-serif;">
     During a series of image edits,
      each edit step is saved on disk, and the before / after results can be
      viewed with the Undo/Redo button. These images use floating
      point numbers for color values and are not compressed. A 20 megapixel
      image makes a 240 MB file. If there are 10 edits in the undo / redo
      stack, the required disk space is 2.4 GB. If disk space runs out during
      an edit session, the program terminates with a message. To avoid this,
      be sure there is plenty of disk space wherever your /tmp directory
      resides. When you
      open a new image or quit Fotoxx, the disk space is recovered. If Fotoxx
      crashes, the space is recovered the next time fotoxx is restarted or the computer is restarted.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Additional
        programs required or recommended for Fotoxx</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Fotoxx requires the following
      libraries and programs to function at run time:<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <table style="text-align: left; width: 749px; height: 160px; font-family: sans-serif;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;xdg-utils</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>open text or html files
              with user's preferred application</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;exiftool </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>(v. 8.60 or later) read
              and write image metadata (tags, comments, etc.)&nbsp;<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;dcraw </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>batch convert RAW image
              files to tiff, jpeg, or png </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;ufraw </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>open a RAW file for
              editing using own GUI </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;rawtherapee<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>open a RAW file for
              editing using own GUI (slightly better results than ufraw)<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;brasero </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>burn a CD or DVD with
              selected images </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;xgamma </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>used for the Monitor
              Gamma function (adjust monitor gamma) </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;fotoxx-maps<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>makes several geographic
              maps available for reporting images by clicked location<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;hugin<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>the function PT Panorama
              uses the panorama tools utilities packaged with hugin<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    </table>
     &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Packages
        required for Fotoxx source build </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    See the README file for
      instructions on compiling Fotoxx from source. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    In addition to the programs
      listed above, the following are also needed: 
    <table style="text-align: left; width: 635px; height: 83px; font-family: sans-serif;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;g++ </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>GNU C++ compiler and C
              libraries </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;libgtk3.0-dev&nbsp; </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Gnome GTK3 / GDK3 /
              Pixbuf / etc. function libraries </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;libtiff5-dev</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>tiff library development
              files </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;libpng12-dev </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>png library development
              files </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;liblcms2-dev </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Little CMS development
              files </small></td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    </table><span style="text-decoration: underline;">
     Note</span>: package naming and
      contents are decisions made by each Linux distro (the usual
      chaos). The
      above names are valid for Debian-based distros (including Ubuntu). For
      other distros the names are different. Good luck. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    zappcrash</span> -
      backtrace dumps<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    If Fotoxx has a fatal error
      (e.g. segment fault - invalid memory reference), it attempts to
      intercept the error and produce a backtrace dump which appears in a
      popup window. Please
      send this information to
      me so I can hopefully fix the error (<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="http://kornelix.com/contact/">contact</a>).
      A description of what you did immediately before the crash would also
      be helpful. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
     Command Line
      Options</span> (long and
        short forms)
    <table style="text-align: left; width: 773px; height: 164px; font-family: sans-serif;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;/.../filename.jpg</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br>

          </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>initial image directory
              or image file to open</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-ver </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-v<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>output release version
              and exit </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-recent <br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-r<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>show a gallery of
              recently seen image files, most recent at the top</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-new&nbsp; <br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-n<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>show a gallery of the
              newest image files (from Index Image Files)<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-prev&nbsp; </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-p<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>show the last file viewed
              in the previous session</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-blank <br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-b<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>show a blank window </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-lang lc_RC <br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-l<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>language code (+ opt.
              region code) to use for GUI (de, de_AT, fr ...)</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-menu "func name" </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-m<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>startup menu function -
              Fotoxx will start with this function active. </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-noindex<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>disable image indexing (see
                below for bad
                implications).<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-cycledesktop ...<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>use fotoxx to rotate
              desktop background image (see <a href="#cycle_desktop">cycle desktop</a>)<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    </table>
    &nbsp; <br><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    -noindex
        option</span><br>

      This command line parameter can be used at Fotoxx startup to disable
      the normal metadata index update. The startup will be faster,
      especially if your image library is large (&gt;20,000 images) or your
      PC is slow. All image search functions and map functions will be
      disabled, since
      results could be wrong if the metadata index no longer matches actual
      image metadata. These functions will work again after a normal fotoxx
      startup is made and the metadata index is updated for any new or
      modified image
      files. Use this option only if you need to quickly look at a few images
      and do not intend editing or searching. Gallery pages may also be quite
      slow
      if they contain many image files that are new or were modified since
      the last index update. This is because the thumbnail files must be
      created as needed. Indexing is always required for an initial Fotoxx installation, but may be suppressed thereafter. <br style="font-family: sans-serif; font-weight: bold;">

    &nbsp; <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Top Panel Status Information </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<small>
    CPU 123%&nbsp; MB 1234&nbsp;
      2345x1234x8&nbsp; 3.45MB&nbsp; 56%&nbsp; edits: 3&nbsp; blocked&nbsp; area active&nbsp; dialog open</small>
    <table style="text-align: left; width: 769px; height: 156px; font-family: sans-serif;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;CPU 123% </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>current Fotoxx CPU load
              for all threads and processor cores </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;MB 1234<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>total free memory,
              including the file cache (which can be reallocated to apps)<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;2345x1234x8<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>image width x height x
              depth (bits per color)</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;3.45M </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>image file size (updated
              when a modified image is saved)</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;56% </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>zoom status, image % size</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;edits: 3 </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>3 edits have been made
              and can be reversed with the [undo] button </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;blocked<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>some menu functions are blocked until the current function is completed<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
<tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;area
              active&nbsp;&nbsp; </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>a select area is present
              and enabled - edits are confined within the area</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;dialog open </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>a dialog for user input
              is open and waiting </small></td>
        </tr><tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;busy [...&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; ]<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>some long running functions show this simple progress bar <br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>

      </tbody>
    </table>&nbsp;
    <span style="font-weight: bold;"><br>
Preview Mode </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    Some edit functions use a
      reduced image size for a faster interactive response time. This reduced
      size is shown on the top panel as <span style="text-decoration: underline;">(reduced)</span>.
When [done] is pressed, the full-size image is then processed. This is
why [done] sometimes takes noticeable time. A monitor-size image (2
megapixels) is 7 times faster to process than a 14 megapixel image
(typical digital camera). This method is used whenever the preview
edits can be applied to the full-size image without visible impact
(Trim/Rotate, Bend functions, brightness and color related functions).
It cannot be used for some functions (e.g. sharpen, tone mapping)
because the results for a small image cannot be converted for a larger
image.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">
    File Size</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

    The file size shown on the top panel while an image is being edited is the original (unedited)
      file size. The file size for an edited image is not known until the
      image is compressed and saved on disk. In memory the size is (pixels x 12). A 10 megapixel image uses 120 megabytes in
      memory and typically &lt; 2 megabytes on disk (compressed JPEG). When the edited
      image is saved, the correct file size is updated on the top panel.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;
    <span style="font-weight: bold;"></span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Ubuntu
        Unity Launcher </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    The following launcher will have
      a right-click dropdown menu with three different startup options: blank
      window, last image viewed, and a gallery of recent images. Save the
      following text as a file named fotoxx.desktop, make it executable, and
      drag the file to the Unity left side launcher list.<br><small>

      &nbsp; <br>


       &nbsp; [Desktop Entry]<br style="font-family: monospace;">

    &nbsp; Name=fotoxx<br style="font-family: monospace;">

    &nbsp; GenericName=Photo Editor<br style="font-family: monospace;">

    &nbsp; Comment=Edit photos and
      manage collections<br style="font-family: monospace;">

    &nbsp; Categories=Photography;<br style="font-family: monospace;">

    &nbsp; Type=Application<br style="font-family: monospace;">

    &nbsp; Terminal=false<br style="font-family: monospace;">

    &nbsp;
      MimeType=image/bmp;image/gif;image/tiff;image/jpeg;image/png;<br style="font-family: monospace;">

    &nbsp; Exec=/usr/bin/fotoxx<br style="font-family: monospace;">

    &nbsp;
      Icon=/usr/share/fotoxx/icons/fotoxx.png<br style="font-family: monospace;">

    &nbsp;
      X-Ayatana-Desktop-Shortcuts=blank window;last image;recent images<br style="font-family: monospace;">

    &nbsp;<br style="font-family: monospace;">

    &nbsp; [blank window Shortcut
      Group]<br style="font-family: monospace;">

    &nbsp; Name=blank window<br style="font-family: monospace;">

    &nbsp; Exec=fotoxx -blank<br style="font-family: monospace;">

    &nbsp; TargetEnvironment=Unity<br style="font-family: monospace;">

    &nbsp; <br style="font-family: monospace;">

    &nbsp; [last image Shortcut Group]<br style="font-family: monospace;">

    &nbsp; Name=last image<br style="font-family: monospace;">

    &nbsp; Exec=fotoxx -prev<br style="font-family: monospace;">

    &nbsp; TargetEnvironment=Unity<br style="font-family: monospace;">

    &nbsp; <br style="font-family: monospace;">

    &nbsp; [recent images Shortcut
      Group]<br style="font-family: monospace;">

    &nbsp; Name=recent images<br style="font-family: monospace;">

    &nbsp; Exec=fotoxx -recent<br style="font-family: monospace;">

    &nbsp; TargetEnvironment=Unity <br style="font-family: monospace;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
</small>
    <span style="font-weight: bold;">
    File
        Types Supported </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Fotoxx uses libraries to support
      reading and writing of image files: the GDK pixbuf library, libpng and
      libtiff. The file types that can be read and written include JPG /
      JPEG, PNG, TIF / TIFF and BMP. Three RGB colors with 8 bits per color
      are supported for all types. PNG and TIFF also support 16 bits per
      color. Fewer than 8 bits per color and grayscale images are partly
      supported, and are converted to RGB internally.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Index
      Files</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    These can be found in the
      directory /home/&lt;user&gt;/.fotoxx/image_index/<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    The files named "index_001",
      "index_002", etc. contain the image file pathnames and those metadata
      items that are indexed for fast searching (dates, ratings, tags,
      caption, comments, geotags). The file "top_directories" contains a list
      of the top image directories. These are searched for new image files
      whenever Fotoxx starts up. The last entry is the thumbnails directory.<br>

      <br><span style="font-weight: bold;">

       Color
        Depth </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
8-bit color (256 brightness levels), as supported by JPEG files, is the
norm for image files and is usually adequate. One brightness step
(averaging 1/256 or 0.4% of the entire range) is very hard to see. A
greater color depth than 8-bits can be useful if a narrow brightness
range within an image has been greatly expanded using retouch or repair
functions. This expansion can lead to visible "banding" or
"posterization". If the RAW image is edited instead of the JPEG (and if
the RAW image really has more than 8 bits of noise-free color), this
problem can be reduced, even if the image is converted back to JPEG for
final storage. Only the most expensive cameras produce RAW image files
with more than 8 bits of noise-free color at normal light levels (ISO
100) (status 2015). <br>

      <br>

      The image below changes gradually from black to white. The color depth
      is 6 bits and the number of brightness levels is 64. Note that the
    brightness steps are barely visible.<br>
    <img style="width: 580px; height: 31px;" alt="" src="images/brightness%20steps.png" align="left" vspace="0">&nbsp; <br clear="all">
    &nbsp; <br><span style="font-weight: bold;">
Noise Measurement</span><br style="font-weight: bold;">
The noise measurement tool (part of the menu Repair &gt; Denoise) measures image
noise. When used on a RAW image, it measures camera sensor noise. To
work properly, the image spot being measured must be an absolutely
uniform area, otherwise variations in subject brightness will be
measured instead of noise. The measured spot should ideally be a
mid-gray tone. A bright area may have little or no noise because the
camera pixels are saturated. The measured noise value applies only for
the ISO exposure level used. Higher ISO levels have more noise. You may
be surprised at the typically high noise levels in RAW images. Cameras
filter out this noise when making the JPEG image. Very expensive
cameras with full-size sensors may have noise levels exceeding 0.5 on
the scale 0-255 (i.e. noise in the 9th bit) and this is for normal ISO values around 100.<br><span style="text-decoration: underline;"><br>
Measurement method</span><br>
An area of radius 10 pixels around the
clicked position is sampled. The RGB brightness levels reported (0-255)
are the averages for this area. Within this area, every pixel is
measured and compared with the mean of the surrounding 5x5 block of
pixels. The RGB noise levels reported are the average differences. If
the sampled area has a small gradient in brightness, the measurement is
not sensitive to this. This is because the central pixel in a 5x5 block
will naturally have the average RGB values of the surrounding pixels
(if noise is zero). The image being measured is actually a 16-bit TIF
image made from the RAW, preserving up to 16 bits of data if this much
is available from the RAW image.<br>
&nbsp;<br><span style="font-weight: bold;">
 Alignment
Algorithm</span>
      (HDR, HDF, Stack, Panorama)
      <br>

Relatively few high-contrast or "edge" pixels are selected to control
      alignment in HDR, HDF, Stack and Panorama. The actual pixels used are
      shown in red during the alignment process, which is also more
      entertaining. Each image in succession is systematically warped various
      small amounts and the fit with other images is tested. This is done
      because two photos made with slightly different horizons or rotations
      will not fit perfectly with simple translation and rotation. Also the
      cylindrical image projection used for panoramas is only an
      approximation of what the camera lens actually does. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Tone
        Mapping Algorithm </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    The method used by Fotoxx is
      home-made. It
      is not as effective as Fattal in some cases, but close. <br>
However, it is fast and simple.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Alpha
        Channels </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Images having alpha channels (transparency information) can be edited,
and the alpha channel is preserved if the image is saved as a PNG file.
JPEG files do not support alpha channels. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Image
        Deterioration From Repeated Editing </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    If you save an edited image file
      and then use this file later to perform additional edits, pixel
      resolution may be lost. It is better if you do all edits when the image
      files are first processed, to minimize image deterioration (or go back
      to the originals if you still have them). Any function that changes
      image size or shape will reduce resolution about 1/2 pixel. These are
      the resize, rotate, bend / warp, and all the composite functions.
      Rotating 90 degrees does not affect resolution. When downsizing an
      image, using the ratios 1/2, 1/3, 1/4 will give the least loss of
      resolution. Functions that change brightness, color or contrast do not
      affect resolution. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    &nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    JPEG
      Compression</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    If
a JPEG file from a digital camera is saved with Fotoxx, you will likely
notice a large reduction in file size, even if a high JPEG quality
level is used. This is because Fotoxx can afford to invest more
processing power in the compression. A camera CPU is not very fast and
must save the photos quickly to be ready for the next photo, so the
processing time available for compression is limited. The CPU of a PC
is typically much faster and has more time, so the compression level is
higher. The smaller file size does not mean that the quality is less. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    
        Image Deterioration From Repeated Saving of JPEG files </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Reading a compressed JPEG image
      and saving it again can lead to loss of detail and increased image
      artifacts. The effect seems to be negligible if JPEG "quality" is set
      to a high value when the image is saved. The image below was saved 10
      times using quality=90 (Fotoxx default), each time opening and saving
      the previous image. Differences can be found if you look hard enough.
      The images are 2x size and the insets are 5x. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <img style="width: 553px; height: 248px; font-family: sans-serif;" alt="" src="images/jpeg%20quality.jpg" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    EXIF
        Errors </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Cameras (esp. older ones) do not
      always produce structurally correct EXIF data, and the program exiftool
      (used by Fotoxx to manipulate EXIF data) may produce error messages. I
      have been able to fix these cases by saving the image file on top of
      itself, which will replace the EXIF data with whatever exiftool was
      able to read correctly. If desired data gets lost, you can restore it
      using the <a href="#edit_any_metadata" target="_blank">Edit Any Metadata</a> function. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Newline
        characters in user Comments and Captions </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    When editing metadata Comments
      or Captions, if you need to align text in columns, you can use the
      [enter] key to force new lines. These are converted into the string
      "\n" before being stored in image EXIF / IPTC data, since newline
      characters are not allowed (exiftool converts them into periods). If
      the text is viewed or edited again, the "\n" strings are converted back
      to new lines, so that the original text alignments are restored. This
      is not standard, so don't expect the text to remain aligned if viewed
      in Photoshop, etc. If this is a requirement, then do not use the enter
      key to make new lines when entering long text - just let the text
      overflow to the next line by itself. In this case, column alignment is not possible. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Installed
      Files </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Foloxx installs files in the following locations. <br>
Repackaging by distros could put them somewhere else, e.g. /opt... instead of /usr...<br>


       
    <table style="text-align: left; width: 664px; height: 71px; font-family: sans-serif;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">&nbsp;/usr/bin/fotoxx </td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>the executable program
              file </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">&nbsp;/usr/share/fotoxx/* </td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>user guide,
              translation.po files, icons, default data, etc. <br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">&nbsp;/usr/share/doc/fotoxx </td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>change log, man page,
              README and other documentation files.&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; <br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    </table>
    <br>
    Installed Files - optional
    fotoxx-maps package<br>
    <table style="text-align: left; width: 577px; height: 48px;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">&nbsp;/usr/share/fotoxx-maps/*<br>
          </td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>geographic maps data
              files (112 MB)&nbsp; <br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">&nbsp;/usr/share/doc/fotoxx-maps/*<br>
          </td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>change log, man page,
              README&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; <br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    </table>
    <br><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Local
        Files </span><br>

      The following files reside in&nbsp; /home/&lt;user&gt;/.fotoxx/
    
    <table style="text-align: left; width: 690px; height: 609px; font-family: sans-serif;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;/albums</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>image albums from
              Manage Albums function<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;/custom_kernel</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>saved custom kernel data
              files</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;/edit_scripts<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>saved edit script files (for batch editing)<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
<tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;/favorites</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>saved data for
              user-configuration of favorites menu</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;/image_index</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>text files containing
              searchable metadata for all image files</small></td>
        </tr>
        
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;/mashup</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>saved mashup project
              files </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;/patterns<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>saved background patterns<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;/printer_color<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>saved printer color calibration files<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
<tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;/retouch_combo</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>saved settings for the
              Retouch Combo function</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;/saved_areas</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>"cutout" files saved from
              the Select Area &gt; Save dialog</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;/saved_curves</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>curve data saved from
              Retouch curve edit dialogs</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;/slideshows</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>user preferences from
              Slide Show function<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;/thumbnails</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>thumbnail files (default
              location, user can change this)</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;/write_text</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>image text overlays saved
              from Add Text function<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;bookmarks</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>bookmark names and image
              file locations</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;KB-shortcuts</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>user-defined or modified
              keyboard shortcuts</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;logfile</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Fotoxx outputs that may
              be relevant for diagnosing problems</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;metadata_short_list<br>
      </small></td>
      <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>metadata key names for Batch Add / Change Metadata<br>
      </small></td>
    </tr>
<tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;mosaic_tiles<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>binary file, compressed
              tiles from the Mosaic function<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;pagesetup</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>saves page setup data for
              print function</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;parameters</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>setup parameters that are
              saved across Fotoxx sessions</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;plugins</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>saves the plugins menu
              contents</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;printsettings</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>saves print settings data
              for print function</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;recent_files</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>a list of the last 100
              files opened by Fotoxx, saved when Fotoxx exits</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;search_results </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>list of the last image
              files found with Search Images </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;stuck-pixels<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>data saved from the Fix
              Stuck Pixels function<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;tags_defined</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>a list of all categories
              and tags currently used in all images</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;zdialog_inputs</small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>saved dialog data for
              dialogs that recall prior inputs</small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;zdialog_positions </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>saved dialog window
              positions (relative to main window)</small></td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    </table>&nbsp;
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;"></span><span style="font-weight: bold;">Metadata
        used by Fotoxx </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    The following metadata items
      (stored inside the image files) are used by Fotoxx. These items and any
      other metadata can be viewed or edited using Fotoxx or other programs. Images can be searched using these items or any
      other metadata as selection criteria. Those marked "index" can be
      searched very fast, others more slowly. Items not listed here are
      searchable but not indexed.<br>

      &nbsp; <br>

    
    <table style="text-align: left; width: 734px; height: 214px; font-family: sans-serif;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;">&nbsp;Metadata
              section and name </td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;">&nbsp;Usage </td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;">&nbsp;Indexed</td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;IPTC&nbsp; Keywords </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;tags entered by
              user </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp; yes </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;IPTC&nbsp; Rating </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;"star" rating
              entered by user </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp; yes </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;EXIF&nbsp;
              ImageSize </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;pixel width and
              height, 1234x2345<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp; yes </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;EXIF&nbsp;
              DateTimeOriginal </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;date / time photo
              was made, or entered by user </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp; yes </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;EXIF&nbsp;
              ImageHistory </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;history of image
              edits <br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp; no </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;EXIF&nbsp;
              UserComment </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;comment text
              entered by user </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp; yes </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;IPTC&nbsp;
              Caption-Abstract </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;caption or abstract
              text entered by user </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp; yes </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;EXIF&nbsp;
              FocalLengthIn35mmFormat </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;camera focal length
              used, 35mm equivalent </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp; no </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;EXIF&nbsp; City,
              Country </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;city and country
              from camera GPS, or entered by user </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp; yes </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;EXIF&nbsp;
              GPSLatitude,
              GPSLongitude </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;earth coordinates
              from camera GPS, or entered by user </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp; yes </small></td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    </table>
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Dialog Window
      Positioning </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    For commonly used dialogs,
      Fotoxx saves the dialog window position (relative to the main window)
      and tries to restore the same position the next time the dialog is
      started. This works, mostly. Sometimes the window manager ignores this
      request and places the dialog somewhere else. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Benchmarks</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    Conditions: Fotoxx 15.11, Ubuntu
      15.10 64-bit, Intel Core i5 2.7 GHz, 7200 rpm disk, EXT4 file system. <br><small><small><small><small>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;

       </small></small></small></small><br>

          
    <table style="text-align: left; width: 697px; height: 278px; font-family: sans-serif;" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
      <tbody>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;">&nbsp;Benchmark
              Description<br>

            </td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;">&nbsp;Time<br>

            </td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;First time index of 9114 image files<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;5.2 min.<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Subsequent startup
              with no new image files<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;&lt; 1 sec.<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Subsequent
              startup, 100 new files to index<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;6 secs.<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Find all images
              with tag "Rosi" (253 images)<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;&lt; 1 sec.<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Find all images
              with "Rosi" in file name (111 images)<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;&lt; 1 sec.<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Find all images
              dated Jan 1 - May 30, 2013 (255 images)<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;&lt; 1 sec.<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Find all images
              dated in 2013 and
              with city = "Freising" (90 images)<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;&lt; 1 sec.<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Find all images
              dated in 2013 with EXIF "make" = "panasonic" (342 images)<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;3.8 secs.<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Click on world
              map, France / Esterel (5 images)<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;&lt; 1 sec.<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;List all locations
              having images with geotags (6714 images)<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;&lt; 1 sec.<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Click on location
              Germany / Dresden (113 images)<br>


            </small></td>
          <td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;&lt; 1 sec.<br>


            </small></td>
        </tr>
      </tbody>
    </table>
<ul>
  <li>Initial index and thumbnail generation: 1752 / minute (2027 for SSD)<br>
</li>
  <li>Incremental index for newly added image files: 1000 / minute</li>
  <li>Search using criteria that is indexed: many thousands / second</li>
  <li>Search using criteria that is not indexed: 90 / second<br>
  </li>
</ul>
 <span style="font-weight: bold;">Source
        Code </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    The C++ source code is heavily
      commented in the hope that others can understand and use the code for
      their own projects. If you have a technical question about how
      something works, or a better idea to pass along, you may <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="http://kornelix.com/contact/">contact
      me</a>. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Questions,
        Problems, Bugs </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    If you have a question or a problem, you may <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="http://kornelix.com/contact/">contact
      me</a>. If you send me any images that work
      poorly, I can use these to try to improve Fotoxx. If there is a
      traceback dump (zappcrash) on the screen, please
      send this to me. Please
      explain how to produce the error
      if you
      can. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Technical
        Reference Book </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    I used the book "Introduction to
      Image Processing and Analysis" by Russ and Russ, CRC Press. It is clear
      and concise. The following algorithms were adapted from this book:
      flatten brightness distribution, noise reduction (median smoothing, top
      hat), sharpen (unsharp mask, kuwahara), embossing. <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">
    Acknowledgements
    </span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    The programs&nbsp; libtiff,
      libpng, liblcms, dcraw and exiftool have helped Fotoxx evolve
      much faster than otherwise possible. Of course this also applies to
      GTK, the GNU tools and libraries, and the
      entire GNU / Linux ecosystem. Thanks to those who have donated their
      work for translations, their ideas for development and their time for
      testing. Special thanks to the following: Dick, Jill, Jamps, Andre,
      Doriano, Curley, Jan, Rosi. Translation credits are in Help &gt; About.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
    <br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
  







</body></html>
fotoxx-common 15.11.1-3 / usr / share / fotoxx / data / userguide-en.html
